Ford 2016 Explorer Owners Manual

2015-10-23

: Ford Ford-2016-Ford-Explorer-Owners-Manual-815557 ford-2016-ford-explorer-owners-manual-815557 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 541 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2016 EXPLORER Owner’s Manual
2016 EXPLORER Owner’s Manual
April 2015
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Explorer
Litho in U.S.A.
fordowner.com ford.ca
GL2J 19A321 AA
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20150317134751
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................11
Special Notices................................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................13
Export Unique Options..................................13
Environment
Protecting the Environment........................14
Child Safety
General Information.......................................15
Child Seats.........................................................16
Installing Child Seats......................................17
Booster Seats..................................................26
Child Seat Positioning..................................28
Child Safety Locks.........................................29
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation....................................31
Fastening the Safety Belts..........................32
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................36
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................36
Safety Belt Minder..........................................37
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance................................................38
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..........................39
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation..................................40
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................41
Front Passenger Sensing System............42
Side Airbags.....................................................44
Passenger Knee Airbag................................45
Safety Canopy™............................................45
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......46
Airbag Disposal...............................................47
Keys and Remote Controls
Principle of Operation..................................48
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................48
Remote Control..............................................49
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................53
MyKey™
Principle of Operation..................................54
Creating a MyKey............................................55
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56
Checking MyKey System Status...............57
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................58
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................58
Locks
Locking and Unlocking................................60
Manual Liftgate...............................................63
Power Liftgate.................................................64
Keyless Entry....................................................67
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................70
Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................71
1
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column...........................................................72
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column...........................................................72
Audio Control...................................................73
Voice Control....................................................74
Cruise Control..................................................74
Information Display Control.......................75
Heated Steering Wheel................................75
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................76
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.........................................77
Autowipers........................................................77
Windshield Washers.....................................78
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........78
Lighting
General Information.....................................80
Lighting Control..............................................80
Autolamps.........................................................81
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................82
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................82
Daytime Running Lamps.............................82
Automatic High Beam Control.................83
Front Fog Lamps............................................84
Direction Indicators.......................................85
Interior Lamps.................................................85
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..............................................87
Exterior Mirrors................................................88
Interior Mirror...................................................90
Sun Visors..........................................................91
Moonroof............................................................91
Instrument Cluster
Gauges...............................................................93
Warning Lamps and Indicators................96
Audible Warnings and Indicators...........100
Information Displays
General Information.....................................101
Information Messages.................................115
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control.............................129
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Premium AM/FM/CD...................131
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System......................132
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................134
Rear Passenger Climate Controls...........137
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................138
Cabin Air Filter...............................................138
Remote Start.................................................139
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position.................140
Head Restraints............................................140
Manual Seats.................................................143
Power Seats...................................................144
Memory Function.........................................146
Rear Seats.......................................................147
Heated Seats.................................................154
Climate Controlled Seats..........................155
Universal Garage Door
Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener................157
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points................................162
2
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Storage Compartments
Center Console..............................................164
Overhead Console.......................................164
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................165
Ignition Switch...............................................165
Keyless Starting............................................165
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................166
Engine Block Heater....................................169
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions........................................171
Fuel Quality.....................................................172
Fuel Quality - E85.........................................172
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................173
Running Out of Fuel.....................................173
Refueling..........................................................174
Fuel Consumption........................................176
Emission Control System...........................177
Transmission
Automatic Transmission...........................180
Four-Wheel Drive
Principle of Operation................................184
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................184
Brakes
General Information....................................189
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................189
Parking Brake.................................................190
Hill Start Assist.............................................190
Traction Control
Principle of Operation.................................192
Using Traction Control................................192
Stability Control
Principle of Operation.................................193
Using Stability Control...............................194
Terrain Response
Using Terrain Response.............................195
Using Hill Descent Control........................196
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation................................198
Rear Parking Aid...........................................198
Front Parking Aid..........................................199
Side Sensing System.................................200
Active Park Assist........................................202
Rear View Camera......................................208
180 Degree Parking Aid Camera..............211
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................213
Using Cruise Control....................................213
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................214
Driving Aids
Driver Alert.....................................................220
Lane Keeping System................................220
Blind Spot Information System..............224
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................227
Steering...........................................................229
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................230
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage.........................233
Cargo Nets......................................................233
Luggage Covers............................................234
Roof Racks and Load Carriers................234
Load Limit.......................................................235
Towing
Towing a Trailer............................................243
3
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Trailer Sway Control...................................244
Recommended Towing Weights...........244
Essential Towing Checks..........................246
Transporting the Vehicle..........................248
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
2.3L EcoBoost™......................................249
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™..........250
Driving Hints
Breaking-In.....................................................252
Economical Driving.....................................252
Driving Through Water...............................253
Floor Mats.......................................................253
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance..................................255
Hazard Warning Flashers.........................256
Fuel Shutoff...................................................256
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................257
Post-Crash Alert System..........................259
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need..............260
In California (U.S. Only).............................261
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................262
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).......................262
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada........................................................263
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................264
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)............................................................264
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)............................................................265
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart..........................266
Changing a Fuse...........................................274
Maintenance
General Information....................................275
Opening and Closing the Hood..............276
Under Hood Overview - 2.3L
EcoBoost™................................................278
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Duratec........................................................279
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™...............................................280
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................281
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Duratec/3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................281
Engine Oil Check...........................................281
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................282
Engine Coolant Check...............................282
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
2.3L EcoBoost™......................................286
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™..........286
Brake Fluid Check........................................288
Power Steering Fluid Check....................288
Washer Fluid Check....................................288
Fuel Filter........................................................289
Changing the 12V Battery.........................289
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................290
Changing the Wiper Blades......................291
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................291
Removing a Headlamp..............................293
Changing a Bulb...........................................293
Bulb Specification Chart...........................297
Changing the Engine Air Filter................299
Vehicle Care
General Information..................................300
Cleaning Products......................................300
Cleaning the Exterior.................................300
Waxing..............................................................301
Cleaning the Engine....................................301
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..........................................................302
4
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Cleaning the Interior...................................302
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.......................303
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................303
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............304
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................304
Vehicle Storage............................................304
Wheels and Tires
General Information...................................307
Tire Care...........................................................310
Using Summer Tires...................................323
Using Snow Chains.....................................324
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........325
Changing a Road Wheel...........................328
Technical Specifications...........................332
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Engine Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™................................................334
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec........................................................335
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™................................................335
Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™......336
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec..............337
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™......338
Vehicle Identification Number................339
Vehicle Certification Label.......................340
Transmission Code Designation............340
Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................341
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec........................................................344
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™................................................348
Audio System
General Information...................................353
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC............................................................354
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD..........................................................357
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
CD..................................................................358
Digital Radio..................................................362
Satellite Radio..............................................364
USB Port..........................................................367
Media Hub......................................................367
SYNC™
General Information...................................368
Using Voice Recognition...........................370
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone.............372
SYNC™ Applications and Services......384
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player...........................................................389
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................398
MyFord Touch™
General Information..................................406
Settings............................................................416
Entertainment..............................................429
Phone..............................................................445
Information....................................................453
Climate............................................................462
Navigation......................................................466
MyFord Touch™ Troubleshooting.........475
Accessories
Accessories....................................................482
Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................484
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.......486
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........489
5
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................492
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........494
Appendices
End User License Agreement.................505
6
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so they may appear
different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
7
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
8
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose
to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used
for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 368).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
9
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
•How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
•Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 368).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 368).
10
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
(U.S. Only)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For your convenience we offer a number
of ways to contact us, as well as to help
manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit,
as well as to access Account Manager,
please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.
11
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
refer to the Warranty Manual that is
provided to you along with your Owner’s
Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active
passenger airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics
(OBD-II) system has a data port for
diagnostics, repair and reprogramming
services with diagnostic scan tools.
Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use
of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty
may not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in device.
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks
and Utility Type Vehicles
WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.
Using Your Vehicle With a
Snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for
snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a
snowplowing package.
Using Your Vehicle as an
Ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an
ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package.
12
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
13
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
14
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds
from National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
WARNINGS
is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial
ministry of transportation, locate your local
St. John Ambulance office by searching for
St. John Ambulance on the internet, or
Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot
days, the temperature in the trunk or
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to these
high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
15
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
•You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 42).
CHILD SEATS
E142594
16
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for Infants, toddlers or
children weighing 40 pounds (18
kilograms) or less (generally age four or
younger)
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
•Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
•Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
•Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
•Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
•For second-row seating positions,
adjust the recliner slightly to improve
child seat fit. If needed, remove the
head restraints.
•For third-row seating positions, stow
the head restraints to improve child
seat fit. See Head Restraints (page
140).
•Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with safety belt systems that would
otherwise require a locking clip.
17
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Standard safety belts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
18
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will provide extra
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
19
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Inflatable safety belts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
20
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable safety belt and pull
upward until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard safety belt, the
inflatable safety belt's unique lap portion
locks the child seat for installation. The
ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to
move freely is normal, even after the lap belt
has been put into the automatic locking
mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with safety belt systems that would
otherwise require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
21
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
WARNINGS
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the seatback and seat
cushion meet (called the seat bight) and
one top tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used
to attach the child seat. For forward-facing
child seats, the top tether strap must also
be attached to the proper top tether
anchor, if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child seat.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat
symbol.
Second-row bucket seats and third-row
passenger side
E190825
22
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Second-row bench seats and third-row
passenger side
E190826
E144054
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seatback below the symbols
as shown. Follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child seat with LATCH
attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps later in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row bench seat are spaced 20.5
inches (52 centimeters) apart. The
standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 11 inches (28 centimeters)
center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed
at the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child seats (with attachments
on belt webbing) can only be used at this
seating position provided that the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions permit
use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not
attach a child seat to any lower anchor if
an adjacent child seat is attached to that
anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
23
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors
may be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
Second row bucket seats and third row
passenger side
E190827
Second row bench seats and third row
passenger side
E190828
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
E190829
24
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Placement of the tether strap
•Second row outboard seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the seatback, under the head
restraint and between the head
restraint posts. If needed, remove the
head restraint to improve the fit of the
child safety seat or tether strap.
•Second row center seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, remove the head restraint to
improve the fit of the child safety seat
or tether strap. See Head Restraints
(page 140).
•Third row seat position: Route the child
safety seat tether strap over the seat
back, under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. If
needed, fold the head restraint down
to improve the fit of the child safety
seat or tether strap. See Head
Restraints (page 140).
1. Route the tether strap.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown. The tether hook may be twisted
½ turn to improve installation. If the
tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
child safety seat may not be retained
properly in the event of a crash.
E190833
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
Second row bucket (40/40)
E190830
25
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Second row bench (60/40)
E190831
Third row seat
E190832
Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edge
of the floor are not tether anchors.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
26
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
•Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
•Can the child sit without slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
E70710
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
27
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
WARNINGS
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
28
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined
weight of
child and
child seat
Restraint
Type
Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
140).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
29
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
30
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been closed
up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
•Lap and shoulder safety belts.
•Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety belt
and rear inflatable safety belt).
•Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
•Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
•Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.
•Safety belt warning light and chime.
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
31
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
The safety belt pretensioners and rear
inflatable safety belts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners at the front seating positions
are designed to tighten the safety belts
firmly against the occupant’s body when
activated. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal
crashes, the safety belt pretensioners can
be activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
FASTENING THE SAFETY
BELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using Safety Belts During
Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should
be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
E142590
32
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety
belt system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all safety belts should be checked
for proper function.
Belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature
or any other safety belt function is not
operating properly when checked by an
authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seat safety belts have
both the vehicle sensitive locking mode
and the automatic locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and
pull webbing out again in a slow and
controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed
in passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 15).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Non-inflatable safety belts
33
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This indicates the
safety belt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
Rear outboard inflatable safety belts
(second row only–if equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until the entire belt is
pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the rear inflatable safety belt.
The rear inflatable safety belts are fitted
in the shoulder portion of the safety belts
of the second-row outboard seating
positions.
Note: The rear inflatable safety belts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the safety
belt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable safety belt consists of
the following:
•An inflatable bag located in the
shoulder safety belt webbing.
•Lap safety belt webbing with
automatic locking mode.
•The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front safety belts.
•Impact sensors located in various parts
of the vehicle.
34
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
How does the rear inflatable safety belt
system work?
The rear inflatable safety belts will
function like standard restraints in
everyday usage.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt will inflate from inside the
webbing.
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body
than regular safety belts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.
WARNING
If the rear inflatable safety belt has
deployed, it will not function again.
The rear inflatable safety belt system
must be replaced by an authorized dealer.
The rear inflatable safety belts are
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal
crashes and some side impact crashes.
The fact that the rear inflatable safety belt
did not inflate in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the
type sufficient to cause activation.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNINGS
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
Do not use extensions with an
inflatable safety belt.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, a safety belt extension assembly
can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is on a label
located either at the end of the webbing
or on the retractor behind the trim. Also,
use the safety belt extension only if the
safety belt is too short for you when fully
extended.
35
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E146191
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt
so the belt rests across the middle of
your shoulder.
2. Slide the adjuster up to raise the belt.
Press the button and slide it down to
lower the belt.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
36
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid the system turning
on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you
place on the front passenger seat, only the
front seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
37
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
switch this feature off, the intent of
the system is to remind you to wear
your safety belt to improve your chance to
survive an accident. We recommend you
leave the system switched on for yourself
and others who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
•The parking brake is set.
•The transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
•The ignition is off.
•The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the
procedure within 20 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light flashes for confirmation.
•This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
•This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), rear
inflatable safety belts (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all safety belt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a crash should
also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See
Cleaning the Interior (page 302).
38
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
•Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
•Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only) and safety
belt usage sensors.
•Driver seat position sensor.
•Front passenger sensing system.
•Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
•Front crash severity sensors.
•Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
•Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
•The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
39
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To reduce the
risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
40
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
•Driver and passenger airbag modules.
•Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 46).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance
of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters)
between an occupant’s chest and the
driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat back, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
41
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a
rear seating position. Failure to follow this
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the front
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always
sit upright against your seatback, with your
feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system which could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger seat and safety
belt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
E181984
The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator that
will illuminate indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled).
The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate
for a short period of time when the ignition
is first turned on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger's frontal airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the
passenger front airbag and seat-mounted
side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty.
42
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
•When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to
remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
•If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then
turn the vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.
•When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the ON lamp and remain
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag OFF
indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the
person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens:
•Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright
position.
•Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
•Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger’s frontal airbag.
•If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit
even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status
indicator
Occupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
43
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 46).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need (page
260).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
•A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
•Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
•Front passenger sensing system.
44
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
46).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
PASSENGER KNEE AIRBAG
The knee airbag is located under the
instrument panel. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the
passenger knee airbag based on crash
severity and occupant conditions. Under
certain crash and occupant conditions, the
passenger knee airbag may deploy but the
passenger front airbag may not activate.
As with front and side airbags, it is
important to be properly seated and
restrained to reduce the risk of death or
serious injury.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain
airbags as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the curtain
airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including
the A, B, C and D pillar trim and headliner)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
45
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
•Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front
and rear side windows identified by a
label or wording on the headliner or
roof-pillar trim.
•A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 46).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it
is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, rear inflatable safety belts,
driver airbag, passenger airbag, seat
mounted side airbags, passenger knee
airbag and the Safety Canopy. Based on
the type of crash (frontal impact or side
impact), the restraints control module will
deploy the appropriate safety devices.
46
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
•The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
•The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
•The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes and in
rollovers.
•The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
•The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
•The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
47
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The remote control allows you to:
•Remotely lock or unlock the vehicle
doors.
•Unlock the doors without actively using
a key or remote control (intelligent
access only).
•Remotely open the power liftgate (if
equipped).
•Remotely start or stop the engine and
user pre-set features (if equipped).
•Arm and disarm the anti-theft system.
•Activate the panic alarm.
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range:
•Weather conditions.
•Nearby radio towers.
•Structures around the vehicle.
•Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
•You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
•You press the luggage compartment
button.
•You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See General
Information (page 101).
48
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(If Equipped)
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
E191532
Press the button to release the key. Press
and hold the button to fold the key back
in when not in use.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with a
security tag that provides important vehicle
key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
E191531
Your intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door.
E176269
Slide the release on the back of the remote
control and pivot the cover off to access
the key blade.
49
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came with
a security tag that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the tag in
a safe place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See General Information (page
101).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Press the button to release the key before
beginning the procedure.
E191533
1. Insert a screwdriver in the position
shown and gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151799
3. Carefully remove the cover.
E151800
50
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.
E151801
5. Remove the battery.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
up.
7. Replace the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses two coin-type
three-volt lithium batteries CR2025 or
equivalent.
E151796
1. Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off.
E153890
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing.
E176226
3. Remove the batteries.
4. Install new batteries with the + facing
each other.
Note: Make sure to replace the label
between the two batteries.
5. Reinstall the housing and cover.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory settings for the driver seat, power
mirrors, steering column and power foot
pedals.
51
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Press the unlock button on a linked remote
control to recall the memory positions. If
you enable the easy-entry-and-exit
feature, the seat moves to the easy-entry
position. The seat moves to the driver
memory position when you put the key in
the ignition.
Linking a Preset Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
See Memory Function (page 146).
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to
deactivate.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
is low on fuel.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from outside the vehicle. The
transmitter has an extended operating
range.
You can configure vehicles with automatic
climate control to turn on the automatic
climate control when you remote start your
vehicle. See Automatic Climate Control
(page 131). A manual climate control
system runs at the setting you set it to
when you switched off the vehicle.
Many states and provinces restrict the use
of remote start. Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work if:
•The ignition is on.
•The alarm system triggers.
•You disable the feature.
•The hood is open.
•The transmission is not in P.
•The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
•The service engine soon light is on.
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
StatusLED
Remote start or
extension
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful; vehicle
off
Solid red
Remote start or
stop failed
Blinking red
Waiting for status
update
Blinking green
52
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
remote starts only if you follow this
sequence.
E138626
The tag with your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch it on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 101).
Note: If you have remote started your
vehicle with an integrated keyhead
transmitter, you must switch on the ignition
before driving your vehicle. With an
intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the brake pedal before driving your
vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
the remote start and the radio does not
turn on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and the
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start period. If you programmed
the periods to last 10 minutes, the second
10 minutes begins after what is left of the
first activation time. For example, if the
vehicle has run from the first remote start
for five minutes, the vehicle continues to
run now for a total of 20 minutes. You can
extend the remote start up to a maximum
of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the
running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display.
See General Information (page 101).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 70).
To re-program the passive anti-theft
system see an authorized dealer.
53
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
•Create a MyKey.
•Program configurable MyKey settings.
•Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
•How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
•The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
•Belt-Minder of safety belt reminder.
You cannot disable this feature. The
audio system will mute when the front
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
•Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
•Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
blind spot information system (BLIS)
with cross traffic alert, lane departure
warning and forward collision warning
system.
•Satellite radio adult content
restrictions (available only in some
markets).
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
•A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
54
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
•Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
•Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
•Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off Advance Trac, 911 Assist or
Emergency Assistance, or Do Not
Disturb (if your vehicle is equipped with
these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with
a push-button start, place the key fob into
the backup slot. The location of your
backup slot is in another chapter. See
Keyless Starting (page 165).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the arrow
keys to get to the following menu
selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from
the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). See
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or fob.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the
arrow keys to get to the following menu
selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
55
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 101).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message
displays.
Clear MyKey
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
56
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 101).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
57
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
I cannot create a MyKey. •The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
•Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine
(page 166).
•SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
•The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 55).
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
•The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 55).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
58
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 70).
I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. •The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
•An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
•The key system has been reset.
•An admin transmitter is present at vehicle
start.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 55).
No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.
59
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any
time.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate a
change to the unlocking mode. Driver door
mode only unlocks the driver door when
you press the unlock button once. All door
mode unlocks all doors when you press
the unlock button once. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the liftgate are
closed.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or
if the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will sound twice and the direction indicators
will not flash.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade
Locking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.
Unlocking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and
you pull the interior handle, you will only
turn off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. You can only open the doors
using the external door handle.
Opening a Rear Door from Inside
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.
60
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
The intelligent access key must be within
3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
At a Door
Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock
and open the door. Do not touch the lock
sensor on the front of the handle.
E185863
The locking sensors are on the front door
handles.
Touch the locking area on the front of the
door handle to lock your vehicle. There is
a brief delay before you can unlock your
vehicle again.
Note: Keep the door handle clean to make
sure the system operates correctly.
Note: Your vehicle does not automatically
lock. If you do not touch a locking sensor
your vehicle will remain unlocked.
At the Liftgate
Press the exterior liftgate release button
on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
See Manual Liftgate (page 63).
Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock
and the horn will sound twice if the key is
still in the ignition.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by either:
•Using the keyless entry keypad with the
driver door closed.
•Pressing the lock button on the remote
control even if the doors are not closed.
If both front doors are closed, you can lock
your vehicle by any method, regardless of
whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, transmission in park
(P) and the ignition off, the system will
search for an intelligent access key in the
passenger compartment after you close
the last door. If the system finds a key, all
of the doors will immediately unlock and
the horn sounds twice, indicating that a
key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
61
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
To override smart unlock, lock your vehicle
after you have closed all doors by:
•Using the keyless entry keypad.
•Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
•Touching the locking area on the front
of the door handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
•The ignition is on.
•The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
•All doors are closed.
•The ignition is on.
•You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
•Your vehicle attains a speed greater
than 4 mph (7 km/h).
Autounlock (If Equipped)
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
•The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed and your vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 4 mph
(7 km/h).
•Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to accessory.
•You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: If you electronically lock your vehicle
after you switch the ignition off with the
driver door closed, the doors will not
autounlock.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock
You can switch autounlock and autolock
on or off independently of each other.
To enable or disable autolock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn sounds
indicating your vehicle is in
programming mode.
6. Press the power door unlock control
and within five seconds, press the
power door lock control. The horn
sounds once if disabled or twice if
enabled.
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn sounds
indicating programming is complete.
To enable or disable autounlock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn sounds
indicating your vehicle is in
programming mode.
6. Press the power door lock control and
within five seconds, press the power
door unlock control. The horn sounds
once if disabled or twice if enabled.
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn sounds
indicating programming is complete.
62
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Illuminated Entry (If Equipped)
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
•The ignition is on.
•You press the remote control lock
button.
•25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
•You switch them on with the lighting
control.
•Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit (If Equipped)
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors
remain closed and:
•25 seconds have elapsed.
•You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access
Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition switched on and
the engine is not running, the battery saver
will turn the ignition off when it detects a
certain amount of battery drain, or after
45 minutes have elapsed.
MANUAL LIFTGATE
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
63
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Opening the Liftgate
Manually
E138632
Press the button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
liftgate, and then pull on the outside
handle.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Closing the Liftgate
E155976
A handle is located inside the liftgate to
help with closing.
POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a safety belt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Keep keys out of reach of children.
Do not allow children to operate or
play near an open or moving power
liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
Two warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. Three short chimes
indicate a problem with the open or close
request, caused by:
64
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
•The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
•The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
•The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible gas strut failure. A repetitive
chime sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. Remove any excessive weight from
the liftgate. If the liftgate continues to
close after opening, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
From the Instrument Panel
E138633
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
E138632
2. Press the control button located in the
top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a gas strut failure.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
65
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
E138636
Press and release the liftgate control
button.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
•Pressing the liftgate control button.
•Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
•Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
•Activating the obstacle detection
feature.
•Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.*
*This method only works for vehicles with
the hands-free liftgate feature.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when
it reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped
moving, you can also manually move it to
the desired height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control
button on the liftgate until you hear a
chime, indicating programming is
complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
to a different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height until you reprogram it,
even if you disconnect the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after
you have programmed a lower height than
fully open, you can fully open the liftgate
by manually pushing it upward to the
maximum open position.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Two short tones sound and the
system reverses to open. Once you remove
the obstacle, you can power close the
liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
66
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound. Once
you remove the obstacle, you can continue
to operate the liftgate.
Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped)
Make sure you have an intelligent access
transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
E174120
1. Move your foot under and away from
the rear bumper detection area in a
single-kick motion. Do not move your
foot sideways or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
2. The liftgate powers open or close.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a gas strut failure.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
intelligent access key away from the rear
bumper detection area when washing your
vehicle.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
E138637
67
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
You can use the keypad to do the
following:
•Lock or unlock the doors.
•Program and erase user codes.
•Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
•Recall memory seat and mirror
positions.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner’s wallet card in the glove
box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also program up to five of
your own five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for
step 4:
•Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
•Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
•Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
•Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
Hints:
•Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
•Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
•The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
The programmed entry codes recall driver
memory positions as follows:
•Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory
positions.
•Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory
positions.
•Entry code 3 recalls driver 3 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not
recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times.
This mode turns off the keypad for one
minute and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after any
of the following occur:
•One minute of keypad inactivity.
•You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
•You switch your vehicle on.
•You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.
68
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad
simultaneously with the driver door closed.
You do not need to enter a code first.
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within
five seconds.
Unlocking Only the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is turned off. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 60).
69
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a coded
key programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters or two
intelligent access keys.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys
(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
70
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Security
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your
vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock
your vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
•Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
•Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle
on within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
71
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 140).
E191039
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E191047
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 140).
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
•Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
•Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.
72
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if the
steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again. The steering column may begin
to move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for an
additional few seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position is set. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it will stop just short of the end of
the column position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 146).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control
during memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the
steering column will move to allow extra
room to exit your vehicle. The column will
return to the previous setting when you
switch the ignition on. You can enable or
disable this feature in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
101).
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
Type 1
E201374
Seek down or previous and
answer call.
A
Volume up or down.B
Mute.C
Seek up or next and end call.D
Type 2
E210273
Seek up or next.A
Media.B
Volume up or down.C
73
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Mute.D
Seek down or previous.E
Seek and Media
Press the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
•Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
•Seek through a track.
Press the media button repeatedly to:
•Scroll through available audio modes.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E201375
Press the button to select or deselect voice
control. See MyFord Touch™ (page 406).
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E200995
Type 2
E200996
See Cruise Control (page 213).
74
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E201376
See Information Displays (page 101).
Information Display Control
Features
E201376
This control functions the same as the
center control on the faceplate. See Audio
System (page 353).
Use this control to adjust the right side of
the information display. Navigate through
the screen and press OK to select.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)
See MyFord Touch™ (page 406).
75
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Never use the controls while your
feet are on the accelerator and brake
pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 146).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
76
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Pedals
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades. See Changing
the Wiper Blades (page 291).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E208209
Rotate the end of the control:
•Away from you to increase the wiper
speed.
•Toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades. See Changing
the Wiper Blades (page 291).
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing. In these conditions, you can do
the following to help keep your windshield
clear:
•Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
•Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
•Switch the autowipers off.
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor,
located in the area around the interior
mirror. The rain sensor monitors the
amount of moisture on the windshield and
automatically turns on the wipers. It
adjusts the wiper speed by the amount of
moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield.
Note: This autowiper feature is
automatically set to on and remains on until
you switch it off in the information display.
You can also switch the feature back on at
any time. See General Information (page
101).
E208222
77
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor. Set the
control to low sensitivity, and the wipers
will turn on when the rain sensor detects
a large amount of moisture on the
windshield. Set the control to high
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on when
the rain sensor detects a small amount of
moisture on the windshield.
Note: When you set the wiper system to
intermittent wipe and the autowiper system
is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting
adjusts the wiper speed according to the
moisture on the windshield only. Use the
wiper lever to wipe the windshield
on-demand.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E208224
Press the end of the wiper lever to activate
the washer:
•A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
•A quick press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe the windshield three
times with washer fluid.
•A long press and hold activates the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on and off through
the information display. See General
Information (page 101).
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer also
operates the front camera washer.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch off the wiper
system before using an automatic car wash.
E208225
78
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Rotate the control to select:
Intermittent operation - the
shortest pause between wipes.
2
Intermittent operation - the
longest pause between wipes.
1
Off.0
Rear Window Washer
E208225
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to activate the rear
washer. The control returns to the 2 or 0
position when you release it.
Rear Camera Washer
Operating the rear washer also operates
the rear camera washer.
79
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
•The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
•A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
•A water puddle inside the lamp.
•Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
Off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
80
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Pull the lever toward you slightly and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may
not activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps
are switched to auto or on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
to do so may result in a collision.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers activate.
If equipped, the following also activate
when the lighting control is in the
autolamps position and you switch them
on in the information display:
•Configurable daytime running lamps.
•Automatic high beam control.
•Adaptive headlamp control.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 101).
Note: With the headlamps in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
•During a mist wipe.
•When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
•If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
81
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
Note: You disable the manual dimmer
when you adjust the setting to Auto
Dimming in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 101).
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
becomes discharged, the illuminated
components will switch to the maximum
setting.
E161902
Press repeatedly or press and hold until
you reach the desired level.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
You can set the delay time to keep the
headlamps on for up to three minutes after
you switch off the ignition.
Follow the steps below to change the
delay time (Steps 1 to 6 must be
completed within 10 seconds):
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control.
3. Turn the lighting control to the off
position.
4. Switch the ignition on.
5. Switch the ignition off.
6. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control. The headlamps and
parking lamps will turn on.
7. Turn the lighting control to the off
position when the required delay time
has been reached. The headlamps and
parking lamps will turn off.
You can set the headlamp exit delay to
one of the following settings:
•Off
•10 seconds
•20 seconds
•120 seconds
Note: You can adjust the time delay using
the display controls in the instrument
cluster. See Information Displays (page
101).
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also,
the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure
the headlamps are switched to auto or on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
82
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
Type 2 - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display controls.
See Information Displays (page 101).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays
(page 101).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The lighting control sensor detects
daylight, and the headlamps or parking
lamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily
override autolamp control.
When switched off in the information
display, the daytime running lamps are off
in all lighting control switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
The system automatically turns on the high
beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the
tail lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
lighting, the system turns off the high
beams before they distract other drivers.
The low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic high
beam is not functioning properly, check the
windshield in front of the camera for a
blockage. A clear view of the road is required
for proper system operation. Make sure that
authorized personnel repair any windshield
damage in the area of the camera's field of
view.
Note: If the system detects a blockage such
as bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,
and you do not observe changes, the system
may go into low beam mode until you clear
the blockage. A message may also appear
in the information display noting the front
camera is blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water
spots do not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam control. However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, you
may notice a decrease in the availability of
the automatic high beam control, especially
at start up. If you want to change the beam
state independently of the system, you may
switch the high beams on or off using the
lighting control switch. Automatic high
beam control resumes when conditions are
correct.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
83
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to decide
when to switch the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
switch on if:
•The outside light level is low enough.
•There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
•The vehicle speed is greater than
32 mph (52 km/h).
The high beams switch off if:
•The system detects the headlamps of
an approaching vehicle or the rear
lamps vehicle in front of you.
•Vehicle speed falls below 27 mph
(44 km/h).
•The outside light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
•The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
•The camera is blocked.
Activating the System
Switch on automatic high beam control
using the information display and
autolamps. See Information Displays
(page 101).
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
Manually Overriding the System
When automatic high beam control has
activated the high beams, pushing or
pulling the stalk provides a temporary
override to low beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or
switch the lighting control from autolamps
to headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
E202426
Press the button to switch the fog lamps
on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except off
and the high beams are not on.
84
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
•To operate the left direction indicator,
push the lever down until it stops.
•To operate the right direction indicator,
push the lever up until it stops.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome Lamp
Without Fog Lamps
E208462
With Fog Lamps
E208463
Use to manually switch the dome lamps
on.
Press the button to switch on the interior
lamps. Press the button again to switch
them off.
Front Row Map Lamps (If Equipped)
E163273
To switch on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The lamps
illuminate when:
•Any door is opened.
•The dome lamp button on the
instrument panel is switched on.
•You press a remote control button and
the ignition is off.
85
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Second Row Dome and Map Lamps
(If Equipped)
E199026
The lamps illuminate when:
•Any door is opened.
•The instrument panel dimmer is
adjusted until the courtesy lamps
switch on.
•You press a remote control button and
the ignition is off.
Second Row Dome and Courtesy
Lamps (If Equipped)
E208464
The lamps illuminate when:
•Any door is opened.
•The instrument panel dimmer is
adjusted until the courtesy lamps
switch on.
•You press a remote control button and
the ignition is off.
The lamp can also be switched on and off
by pressing the lens depression.
Third Row Cargo Lamp (If Equipped)
E169470
The lamps illuminate when:
•Any door is opened.
•The instrument panel dimmer is
adjusted until the courtesy lamps
switch on.
•You press a remote control button and
the ignition is off.
The lamp can also be switched on and off
by pressing the control switch.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
The parking lamps do not turn off if they
have been switched on.
86
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window closes fully.
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when
you lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
87
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running) and then:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
The exterior mirrors fold in toward the
glass automatically when you place the
transmission into park (P), open a front
door and then lock your vehicle by using
either the lock button on the door or with
the lock button on your remote transmitter.
Auto-folding mirrors unfold and return to
their original position automatically after
you unlock your vehicle, and then open and
close the driver's door.
You can switch this feature on and off
through the information display. See
General Information (page 101).
E170431
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the door lock control located on
the door. The control will light and the
mirrors will fold in toward the glass. Press
the control again to unfold the mirrors. The
control light will turn off.
Note: If you use the control to fold the
mirrors on demand and the auto fold feature
is switched on, you must use the control
again to unfold them.
88
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Loose Mirror
If you manually fold your power-folding
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
•The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
•The mirrors feel loose.
•The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
•One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time you manually
fold the mirrors.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
138).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 146).
Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically
dims when the interior auto-dimming
mirror turns on.
Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
While the vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
assist you by increasing visibility along the
side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
89
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image
transitions from the main mirror and begins
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 224).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
90
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
Opening and Closing the
Sunscreen
E193983
Press and release the control to open the
sunscreen.
Note: The sunscreen stops at the first panel
for the dual panel moonroof. Press and
release again to continue to open the
sunscreen past the second panel.
Pull and release the control to close the
sunscreen. The moonroof, if open,
automatically closes prior to closing the
sunscreen.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The sunscreen, if
closed, automatically opens prior to
opening the moonroof. The moonroof
stops short of the fully opened position.
91
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the
moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof stops automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event to
override this function. While bounce-back
is active, the closing force increases for
each of the next three times that you close
the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT
control to close the moonroof.
92
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
Type 1
E193714
Tachometer.A
Information display. See Information Displays (page 101).B
Speedometer.C
Fuel gauge.D
Engine coolant temperature gauge.E
93
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Type 2
E193715
Left information display. See Information Displays (page 101).A
Speedometer.B
Right information display. See MyFord Touch™ (page 406).C
94
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Type 3
E203205
Tachometer.A
Information display. See Information Displays (page 101).B
Speedometer.C
Fuel gauge.D
Engine coolant temperature gauge.E
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Compass
Displays the vehicle's heading direction.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 101).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 101).
95
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
Shows the temperature of the engine
coolant. At normal operating temperature,
the needle will remain in the center section.
If the needle enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
cause once the engine has cooled down.
Note: Do not restart the engine until the
cause of the overheating has been resolved.
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.
The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
•It may take a short time for the needle
to reach full after leaving the gas
station. This is normal and depends
upon the slope of pavement at the gas
station.
•The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
at the gas station.
•If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.
•There is a small reserve left in the tank
when the fuel gauge reaches empty.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the
distance to empty reaches 75 miles (120
km), 50 miles (80 km), 25 miles (40 km),
10 miles (20 km) and 0 miles (0 km) .
Variations:
Note: The low fuel warning and
distance-to-empty warning can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 214).
96
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
On (white light): Illuminates when you
switch on the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
you engage the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when you disengage the
speed control system.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You continue to
have the normal braking system (without
ABS) unless the brake system warning
lamp is also illuminated. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Automatic High Beam Control
It will illuminate when this
feature is on. See Automatic
High Beam Control (page 83).
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
It illuminates when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 224).
Brake System
E144522
It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake with the
ignition on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by an authorized
dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the
risk of personal injury.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It illuminates when you switch
this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right direction
indicator or the hazard warning
flasher. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb. See
Changing a Bulb (page 293).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 282).
97
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 281).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It illuminates and a chime
sounds to remind you to fasten
your safety belt. See Safety
Belt Minder (page 37).
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Lights when you switch the front
fog lamps on.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights illuminates
on the windshield in certain
instances when using adaptive
cruise control and/or the collision warning
system. It also illuminates momentarily
when you start your vehicle to make sure
the display works.
High Beam
It illuminates when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hood Ajar
E159324
Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Lane Keeping Aid (If Equipped)
E144813
Lights when the lane keeping
system is activated.
Liftgate Ajar
Lights when the liftgate is not
completely closed.
Low Fuel Level
It illuminates when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check
your tire pressure as soon as possible.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
98
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It illuminates when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It illuminates when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when the system
detects a powertrain or an 4WD
fault. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays illuminated
after you start the engine, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
of the vehicle emissions control system.
Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in
the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more
information about having your vehicle
serviced. See Emission Control System
(page 177).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when you first switch on the
ignition before engine start to check the
bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle
is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light
stays on until you crank the engine, then
turns itself off if no malfunctions are
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times,
it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See Emission Control
System (page 177).
Stability Control
E138639
It flashes when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system switches off. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 194).
Stability Control Off
It illuminates when you switch
the system off. It goes out when
you switch the system back on
or when you switch the ignition off. See
Using Stability Control (page 194).
Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
E161509
Illuminates when you activate
the tow/haul feature. If the light
flashes steadily, have the system
serviced immediately. Damage to the
transmission could occur. See Automatic
Transmission (page 180).
99
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
Engine On Warning Chime
A warning chime will sound when any door
is opened if the vehicle exceeds a relatively
low speed.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit the
vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN,
indicating the vehicle is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
Automatic Transmission Warning
Chime
Sounds when you have not moved the
transmission selector lever to position P.
A message will be shown in the display.
100
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information appears in the
information display.
Information Display Controls
(Type 1)
E193720
•Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
submenu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
submenu.
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Trip 1 & 2
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
101
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
Digital Speedo
Distance to E
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Fuel Used
Average Fuel
All Values
Total Odometer (located in the lower right of the display)*
*This also displays in other menus.
•Digital Speedo - Shows a digital display
of your vehicle speed.
•Distance to E — Shows the
approximate distance your vehicle can
travel before running out of fuel.
•Trip Odometer — Registers the
distance of individual journeys.
•Trip Timer — The timer stops when you
turn your vehicle off and restarts when
you restart your vehicle.
•Fuel Used — Shows the amount of fuel
used for a given trip.
•Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel
economy for a given trip.
•All Values — Shows the Distance to E,
Trip Odometer, Trip Timer and Average
Fuel.
Note: Press and hold OK on the current
screen to reset the respective trip, distance,
time and fuel information.
Fuel Economy
Information
Distance to Empty
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Average MPG
Fuel History
All Values
102
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
•Distance to Empty - Shows the
approximate distance your vehicle can
travel before running out of fuel.
•Instantaneous Fuel Economy - Shows
a visual graph of your instantaneous
fuel economy along with your Avg MPG
since the function was last reset.
•Average MPG — Shows the average
fuel economy since last reset.
•Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of your
fuel history.
•All Values — Shows all fuel economy
values (DTE, Inst Fuel Econ, Avg Fuel).
Note: You can reset your average fuel
economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the left hand steering wheel
controls.
Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Driver Assist
Traction Ctrl - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Intelligent 4WD with Terrain Management System
Alert, Aid or Alert +AidModeLane Keeping
System High, Normal or LowIntensity
High, Normal or LowAlert SensitivityPre-Collision
Rear Park Aid - check enabled uncheck disabled
4 Wheel Tire PressureTire Pressure
Trailer Sway - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
103
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
All SensorsAlarmVehicle
Perimeter Sensing
Ask on Exit
Auto Engine Off - check enabled uncheck disabled
Information - check enabled or uncheck disabledChimes
Normal or TowingDTE Calcula-
tion
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Auto Highbeam - check enabled or uncheck disabledLighting
Off or XX SecondsAutolamp Delay
Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabledLocks
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Relock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
All Doors or Driver's DoorRemote unlock
Switches Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autofold - check enabled or uncheck disabledMirrors
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Reset
Enable Switch or Disable SwitchPower Lift-
gate
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote
Start Automatic or OffSeats or Seats and
Wheel
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Courtesy Wipe or Rain SensingWipers
104
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
MyKey QtyMyKey
Status
MyKey
MyKey Odo
Admin Key Qty
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate
MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
On or OffDo Not
Disturb
Always On or User SelectableTraction
Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear
MyKeys
Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/LDistanceDisplay Setup
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temper-
ature
psi, kPa or barTire Pres-
sure
Choose your applicable settingLanguage
Note: Some MyKey items only appear if a
MyKey is set.
105
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information Display Controls
(Type 2)
E193721
•Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
•Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main Menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
•Display Mode.
•Trip 1 & 2.
•Fuel Economy.
•Driver Assist.
•Settings.
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back
to the main menu.
Display Mode
Use the up or down arrow buttons to
choose between the following display
options.
Display Mode
Option 4*
Option 3Option 2
Option 1*
Display mode
--XXXXX mi (km) to
empty
XX--Round tacho-
meter
--X-Vertical tacho-
meter
106
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Display Mode
Tire pressure on demand screen
Digital speedometer - XXX MPH - Press OK for km/h
Intelligent 4WD - 4WD Gauge with Terrain Management System
*Vehicles with Intelligent 4WD only. You can choose to have only the fuel gauge show in
this mode. Refer to Display > Gauge Display found in the table under the Settings section
later in this chapter.
XXX mi (km) to empty
Shows approximate fuel level before the
fuel tank reaches empty. The value is
dynamic and can change (raise or lower)
depending on driving style.
Fuel gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge
indicates approximately how much fuel is
in the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel
pump symbol shows the fuel filler door
side of your vehicle. When the fuel level
becomes low, the level indicator changes
to amber. When the fuel level becomes
critically low, the level indicator changes
to red.
Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or when driving
on a slope.
Note: When a MyKey is in use, low fuel
warnings display earlier.
Bar or Round tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute. Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine. During SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the
currently selected gear appears in the
display.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator is in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
Intelligent 4WD (if equipped)
Displays power distribution between the
front and rear wheels. More power to either
the front or rear wheels displays by more
area filled in. Intelligent 4WD also displays
the currently selected terrain management
mode.
Trip 1 & 2
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
107
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
All Values
•All Values — shows all trip values (Trip
Timer, Trip Odometer and Average
Fuel).
•Trip Odometer — Shows your
accumulated trip distance.
•Average Fuel — Shows your average
fuel economy for a given trip.
•Trip Timer— The timer stops when you
turn your vehicle off and restarts when
you restart your vehicle.
Note: You can reset your trip information
by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Inst Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset
Fuel History
•Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visual
graph of your instantaneous fuel
economy, average fuel economy and
distance to empty.
•Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your
fuel history from the past 30 min,
average fuel economy and distance to
empty.
Note: You can reset your average fuel
economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the left hand steering wheel
controls.
Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Driver Assist
Traction Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic Alert- check enabled or uncheck disabled
—Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled
108
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Alert, Aid or BothModeLane Keeping
High, Normal or LowIntensity
High, Normal or LowAlert SensitivityPre-Collision
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Trailer Sway - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Settings
SettingsAlarmVehicle
Perimeter Sensing
Ask on Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Normal or TowingDTE Calcula-
tion
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
On or OffAuto HighbeamLighting
Off or XX SecondsAutolamp Delay
Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabledLocks
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Relock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
All doors or Driver's doorRemote Unlock
Switch Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autofold - check enabled or uncheck disabledMirrors
XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Reset
109
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Enable Switch or Disable SwitchPower Lift-
gate
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote
Start Auto or OffSeats or Seats and
Wheel
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or uncheck disabledWipers
Rain Sensing - check enabled or uncheck disabled
MyKeys QtyMyKeyMyKey
MyKey Odometer
Admin Key Qty
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate
MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Always On or User SelectableDo Not
Disturb
Always On or User SelectableAdvancTrac
Choose desired speed or offMAX Speed
Choose desired speed or offSpeed
Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear
MyKeys
Miles & Gallons, l/100km or km/lDistanceDisplay Settings
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temper-
ature
110
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge
Display
psi, kPa or barTire Pres-
sure
Choose your applicable settingLanguage
Note: Some MyKey items only appear if a
MyKey is set.
Information Display Controls
(Type 3)
E203206
•Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
•Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
Main Menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
•Trip 1 & 2.
•Fuel Economy.
•Driver Assist.
•Settings.
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back
to the main menu.
Trip 1 & 2
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
111
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
All Values
•All Values — shows all trip values (Trip
Timer, Trip Odometer and Average
Fuel).
•Trip Odometer — Shows your
accumulated trip distance.
•Average Fuel — Shows your average
fuel economy for a given trip.
•Trip Timer— The timer stops when you
turn your vehicle off and restarts when
you restart your vehicle.
Note: You can reset your trip information
by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset
Fuel History
•Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visual
graph of your instantaneous fuel
economy, average fuel economy and
distance to empty.
•Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your
fuel history from the past 30 min,
average fuel economy and distance to
empty.
Note: You can reset your average fuel
economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the left hand steering wheel
controls.
Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Driver Assist
Traction Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Intelligent 4WD with Terrain Management SystemIntelligent 4WD
Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic - check enabled or uncheck disabled
—Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
112
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Hill Start Assist - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Alert, Aid or BothModeLane Keeping
High, Normal or LowIntensity
High, Normal or LowAlert SensitivityPre-Collision
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
4 Wheel Tire Pressure DisplayTire Pressure
Trailer Sway - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Settings
SettingsAlarmVehicle
Perimeter Sensing
Ask on Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Normal or TowingDTE Calcula-
tion
Information - check enabled or uncheck disabledChimes
Easy Entry/Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Auto Highbeam - check enabled or uncheck disabledLighting
Off or XX SecondsAutolamp Delay
Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autolock - check enabled or uncheck disabledLocks
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Relock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
All doors or Driver doorRemote Unlock
113
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Switch Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autofold - check enabled or uncheck disabledMirrors
XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Reset
Enable Switch or Disable SwitchPower Lift-
gate
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote
Start Auto or OffSeats or Seats and
Wheel
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or uncheck disabledWipers
Rain Sensing - check enabled or uncheck disabled
MyKeys QtyMykey
Status
MyKey
MyKey Odometer
Admin Key Qty
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate
MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
On or OffDo Not
Disturb
Always On or User SelectableTraction
Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Choose desired speed or offSpeed
Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear
MyKeys
Miles & Gallons, l/100km or km/lDistanceDisplay Settings
114
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temper-
ature
psi, kPa or barTire Pres-
sure
Choose your applicable settingLanguage
Speedometer km/h - check enabled or uncheck disabledSpeedo-
meter
Note: Some MyKey items only appear if a
MyKey is set.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may display abbreviated
or shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E203207
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages
delete automatically after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
4WD
ActionMessage
The four wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself
due to the system overheating.
4WD Temporarily
Disabled
The four wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself
due to the system overheating or you are using the spare tire.
4WD Off
The four wheel drive system resumes normal function and
clears this message after driving a short distance with the
road tire re-installed or after the system cools.
4WD Restored
115
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The four wheel drive system is not operating properly and the
powertrain fault indicator illuminates. See Warning Lamps
and Indicators (page 96). If the warning stays illuminated
or continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
4WD Malfunction
Service Required
Displayed when the transfer case fluid requires service.Change 4WD Power
Transfer Unit Lube
Displayed when the transfer case fluid has been changed and
reset to new.
4WD Power Transfer
Unit Lube Set to New
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from
engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 214).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function
properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 214).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to
bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of radar. Driver can
typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 214).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac
The driver has disabled or enabled the traction control.AdvanceTrac Off On
Alarm
ActionMessage
Unauthorized entry triggered the alarm. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 71).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle
116
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is preparing to shutdown.Engine Shuts Off In XX
Seconds
The engine has shutdown to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy
The engine is preparing to shutdown. You can press OK on
the left steering wheel button to override the shutdown.
Engine Shuts Off in XX
Seconds Press OK to
Override
Automatic High Beam Control
ActionMessage
The front camera sensor has reduced visibility. Clean the
windshield.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
The front camera sensor has malfunctioned. Wait a short
period of time for the sensor to cool down.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
117
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system detects an extended low
voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve the system voltage.
Once the system voltage recovers, the disabled features will
operate as normal.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Switch the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you
start the vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered.
Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allows faster battery
state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off to Save
Battery
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible. See Blind Spot Information System
(page 224).
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 224).
Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 224).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
118
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Brake System
ActionMessage
The brake fluid level is low. Check the brake system immedi-
ately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 288).
Brake Fluid Level LOW
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive
your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays
on after you release the parking brake, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning
system. The system is disabled. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Collision Warning
Malfunction
The collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor
radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front
of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning
system. The system is disabled. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The driver door is not completely closed.Driver Door Ajar
The passenger door is not completely closed.Passenger Door Ajar
The rear left door is not completely closed.Rear Left Door Ajar
The rear right door is not completely closed.Rear Right Door Ajar
The liftgate is not completely closed.Liftgate Ajar
119
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar
The system has disabled the door switches.Switches Inhibited
Security Mode
The factory keypad code displays in the information display
after the system resets the keypad. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 70).
Factory Keypad Code
XXXXX
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested
Electronic Stability Control
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.ESC Service required
Displays the traction control system status.ESC Off
Displays the traction control system status.ESC On
Engine
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the
problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 282).
High Engine Temper-
ature Stop Safely
Engine service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.Engine Fault Service
Now
Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 281).Engine Oil Level Low
Check Level
120
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level LOW
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Hill Descent Control
ActionMessage
Displays when you deactivate hill descent control mode.Hill Descent Control OFF
Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h).For Hill Descent Reduce
Speed
Displays when hill descent control mode requires you to shift
the transmission into gear.
For Hill Descent Select
Gear
Displays when the hill control mode requires you to resume
control.
Hill Descent Driver
Resume Control
Displays when a hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control
Fault
Displays when you disable the hill descent control mode to
cool the brake system.
Hill Descent Control Off
System Cooling
Displays when you activate the hill descent control mode.Hill Descent Control
Ready
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.
See Hill Start Assist (page 190).
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
121
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake
The system does not detect the key. See Keyless Starting
(page 165).
No Key Detected
When you press the Start Stop button to shut off the engine,
the system does not detect an Intelligent Access key inside
your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Full Accessory Power
Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Successful
You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.
Key Program Failure
You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
system.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough Keys
Learned
The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.
See Remote Control (page 49).
Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle with the intelli-
gent access key and the engine is on.
Engine ON
122
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires a clean
windshield to operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visib-
ility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the
steering wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible. Switch off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
LOW Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil
Check (page 281).
Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 281).Oil Change Required
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Overtem-
perature
The washer fluid is low and needs refilling.Washer Fluid Level Low
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact
Dealer
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer
123
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
You cannot program a MyKey during key programming.MyKey Not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey
speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your
vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle Near Top Speed
MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive
Safely
A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is active.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
You attempted to program a spare key using two existing
MyKeys.
Could Not Program
Integrated Key
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation
(page 198).
Check Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation
(page 198).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehicle
more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after you
have released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Engaged
124
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Malfunction
Service Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
at a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Service Power Steering
Now
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system, or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
You need to turn the steering wheel in order to disengage the
steering lock.
Steering column lock:
Remove and re-insert
key while turning wheel
to unlock
Pre-Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Pre-Collision Warning
Malfunction
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Pre-Collision Assist (page 230).
Pre-Collision Warning
Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Pre-Collision Warning
Not Available
Remote Start
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
to drive your vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button
125
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Seats
ActionMessage
Objects are by the passenger seat. After you move the objects
away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not
Permitted While Driving
Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory X Saved
Starting System
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake
The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.
Cranking Time Exceeded
The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 325).
LOW Tire Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 325).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is
in use. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 325).
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
126
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Terrain Management System
ActionMessage
Displays terrain management normal mode is currently active.Normal Mode Active
Displays terrain management snow, gravel, grass mode is
currently active.
Snow, Gravel, Grass
Mode Active
Displays terrain management mud, ruts mode is currently
active.
Mud, Rut Mode Active
Displays terrain management sand mode is currently active.Sand Mode Active
Displays when the terrain management system detects an
error.
Terrain Management
System Fault
Displayed when terrain management mode cannot be
changed at the time of your request.
Mode Change Not
Accepted, Retry
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using
Traction Control (page 192).
Traction Control Off
Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using
Traction Control (page 192).
Traction Control On
Trailer
ActionMessage
Displays when the trailer sway control has detected a trailer
sway. See Trailer Sway Control (page 244).
Trailer Sway Reduce
Speed
127
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Transmission
ActionMessage
Contact an authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunc-
tion Service Now
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as possible.
Transmission Overtem-
perature Stop Safely
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as possible.
Transmission Over-
heating Stop Safely
Contact an authorized dealer.Transmission Service
Required
The transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too Hot
Press Brake
The transmission has overheated and has limited functionality.
See Automatic Transmission (page 180).
Transmission Limited
Function See Manual
The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before
you drive.
Transmission Warming
Up Please Wait
A reminder to shift into park.Transmission Not in Park
A request for you to apply the brake as needed by the trans-
mission.
Press Brake Pedal
The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.Transmission Adjusted
The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission Adapt-
Mode
The transmission is locked and unable to select gears.Transmission Indicat-
Mode Lockup On
The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears.Transmission Indicat-
Mode Lockup Off
128
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
E193398
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
B
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through the
following combinations: windshield, windshield/floor, panel, panel/floor, and
floor.
C
Note: At least one of these buttons illuminates when the system is on.
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
D
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
129
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
MAX A/C: Adjust the control for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows
through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and
the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
F
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
G
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Rear passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature to the rear of
the passenger compartment.
H
Rear climate control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear
passenger settings through the front controls.
I
Rear passenger power: Press the button to switch the system on and off.J
Rear fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated to the rear of the
passenger compartment.
K
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off.
L
130
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: PREMIUM
AM/FM/CD
E193399
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
A
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on
and off.
B
Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting using the control
on the driver side.
C
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off.
D
MAX Defrost: Press the button to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through
the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to
defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
E
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through the
following combinations: windshield, windshield/floor, panel, panel/floor, and
floor.
F
131
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
G
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
H
Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the passenger
side.
I
DUAL: Press the button to switch on control for the passenger side of the
vehicle.
J
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
K
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.L
AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the
desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle
to maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode
by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds.
M
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AUDIO SYSTEM
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
132
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
E193400
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
A
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
B
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
C
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
133
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
DUAL: Press the button to switch on control for the passenger side of the
vehicle.
D
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on
and off.
E
Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the passenger
side.
F
Climate controlled seats: Press the button to switch the climate controlled
seats on and off.
G
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.H
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
I
Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting using the control
on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature
when you switch off dual zone mode.
J
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off.
K
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
L
MAX Defrost: Press the button to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through
the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to
defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
M
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the
desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle
to maintain the desired temperature. You can also turn off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding the button for greater than two seconds.
N
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
134
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach comfort
in hot weather, drive with the windows fully
open until you feel cold air through the air
vents.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the cabin to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
outside temperatures, the system directs
airflow to the windshield and side window
vents. In addition, the fan may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting.
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
135
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Heating
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the MAX A/C button.Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
1
Drive with the windows fully open until
you feel cold air through the air vents.
2
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
2
Select the instrument panel air vents
using the air distribution buttons.
3
136
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the defrost button.Select the windshield air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Press the A/C button.2
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
4
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS
E188689
137
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats (page 154).
B
Temperature control: Control the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
C
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the instrument
panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination
of these vents.
D
Fan speed control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear
passenger settings through the front controls.
E
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS (If Equipped)
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. The heated rear window
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time. Start the engine before you
switch the heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
•It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
•It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
•It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 486).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
138
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
REMOTE START (If Equipped)
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle.
The climate control system works to
achieve comfort according to your previous
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system
to its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back
on, such as:
•Heated seats.
•Cooled seats.
•Heated steering wheel.
•Heated mirrors.
•Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page 101).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated seats do not
automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster
and heated mirrors automatically turn on.
139
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
•Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
•Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
•Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
•Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
•Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
•Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
•Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied.
140
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front seat head restraints
E138642
Second-row center seat head restraint
(If equipped)
E138645
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
141
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Second-row outboard seat head
restraints
E201128
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Fold button.D
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button D.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Fold the head restraint.
2. Press and hold both C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Third-row head restraints
E190836
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Fold strap.C
Folding the Head Restraint
Pull the fold strap (C). Pull it back up to
reset.
Note: Press the stow or fold button on the
power folding seats to automatically fold
the head restraint.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
142
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to the
rearward, un-tilted position.
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving.
Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.
E190838
Recline Adjustment
WARNING
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
E190837
143
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped)
E190839
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
while the vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
E176038
144
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E176039
Multi-Contour Front Seats With
Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system will turn off
after 20 minutes.
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seatback and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.
E156301
Lumbar and bolster modeMassage mode
Upper lumbarBack massage intensity
adjustment
A
Lumbar decreaseMassage intensity decrease
and off*
B
Lower lumbar**
Cushion massage intensity
adjustment
C
Lumbar increaseMassage intensity increaseD
-On and offE
*The massage feature will default to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature will default to the
middle lumbar mode.
**Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function. To access and make
adjustments to the lumbar setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
> Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.
145
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Lo or Hi.
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following:
•Driver seat.
•Power mirrors.
•Optional power adjustable foot pedals.
•Optional steering column.
The memory control is located on the
driver door.
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or when the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N)
(and your vehicle is not moving) if the
ignition is on.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
•Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked
to a preset position.
•Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
•Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Locks (page
60).
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control (or any memory button)
during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
146
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to three remote controls
or intelligent access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to recall a memory position.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat position rearward up to two inches
(five centimeters) when you switch the
ignition off.
The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 101).
REAR SEATS
Adjusting the Rear Seats
Second Row Seats
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat’s
safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injuries in the event of a crash.
Recline Adjustment
E190840
Lift the handle to adjust the seatback
rearward or forward. The seatback can
also fold forward until it is flat.
Fold flat seatback
E190841
147
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Lift the handle and fold the seatback
forward until it is flat.
Note: For the bench seats, make sure the
center safety belt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Moving the Seats Backward and
Forward (If equipped)
E190838
Third Row Seats (Manual Seats)
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
Do not adjust or release the seat
floor latch while vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the vehicle with seats
in the tumbled position. Always latch the
vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat
is occupied or empty. If not latched or if
the seat is tumbled, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
Note: Remove items from the second-row
seat. Make sure that no bulky objects such
as purses or briefcases are on the floor in
front of the second-row seats before
tumbling them.
Note: For second-row bench seats, make
sure the center safety belt is unbuckled
before folding the seatback.
Note: You may have to move the front-row
seat forward to allow the second-row seat
to be fully tumbled.
Note: You may have to lower the center
head restraint. See Head Restraints (page
140).
Fold and tumble the second-row seat to
access the third row:
E193964
1. Fold the outboard head restraint.
E190843
2. Lift the handle located on the side of
the seat to fold the seatback flat.
148
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E190844
3. Lift the handle all the way up until the
seat releases from the floor. Rotate the
seat forward to allow access to the
third row.
E190845
4. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.
E190846
5. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until
you hear a click, locking it in the upright
position. Note: The seatback will not
raise if the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor striker. If
the seatback does not raise, then
repeat Step 4.
6. Pull the head restraint back up to its
normal adjusted position.
E190847
Make sure that the rear latch hooks are
properly engaged with the floor striker.
Note: Make sure that the seat and seatback
are latched securely in position. Keep floor
area free of objects that would prevent
proper seat engagement.
Third Row Seat Access (Power Fold
and Tumble Seat-If equipped)
WARNING
Make sure that the seat is
unoccupied when folding it down.
Folding the seat while occupied
could result in occupant injury or damage
to the seat.
149
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E190848
The control is located at the back of the
rear door opening. Press and hold it to fold
the seatback down and tumble the seat
forward for access to the third row.
Third Row Seat Exit (Manual Seat,
Power Fold and Tumble Seat)
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
Do not adjust or release the seat
floor latch while vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the vehicle with seats
in the tumbled position. Always latch the
vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat
is occupied or empty. If not latched or if
the seat is tumbled, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
Note: You may have to lower the center
head restraint. See Head Restraints (page
140).
E193964
1. Fold the outboard head restraint.
E190849
2. Pull on the strap located on the back
of the second row seat. This will fold
the seatback forward. Pull the strap a
second time to tumble the seat
forward, allowing easy exit from the
third row seat.
E190850
150
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
3. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.
E190846
4. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until
you hear a click, locking it in the upright
position. Note: The seatback will not
raise if the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor striker. If
the seatback does not raise, then
repeat Step 3.
5. Pull the head restraint back up to its
normal adjusted position.
E190847
Make sure that the rear latch hooks are
properly engaged with the floor striker.
Note: Make sure that the seat and seatback
are latched securely in position. Keep floor
area free of objects that would prevent
proper seat engagement.
Folding the Third Row Manual Seat
1. Remove all objects from the seat and
stowage tub.
E193843
2. Fold the outboard head restraint by
pulling the head restraint release strap.
E190854
3. From the rear of the vehicle, fold the
seatback by pulling and holding the red
strap while pushing the seatback
forward. Release the strap once the
seatback starts rotating forward.
151
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E190923
4. Release the cushion latches by pulling
the short black strap while pulling on
the strap located at the top of the
seatback to tumble the seat all the way
into the tub in the floor.
Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo
tie downs.
E190924
Note: Do not use the third row seat back as
a load floor when the seatback is folded.
Note: Make sure that the area under the
seat is free of objects before stowing it.
Unfolding the Third Row Manual Seat
WARNINGS
Make sure seat is latched to vehicle
floor by pushing and pulling on the
seat. If not latched, the seat may
cause injury during a sudden stop.
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
Do not drive the vehicle when the
third-row seat is rotated backwards.
During a sudden stop, the safety
belts are not functional in this position and
the third-row seat can rapidly tip back to
the forward position, all of which may
result in serious injury.
E190927
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: Make sure the area under the load
floor is free of objects before unstowing it.
152
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E190925
1. Unlatch and lift the seat out of the tub
in the floor by squeezing and pulling up
on the handle. Once the seat is at a
vertical position, push the seat over,
letting it fall onto the latches.
E190926
2. To return the seatback to the upright
position, pull the red strap. Then while
holding the red strap, pull the long
strap located on the seatback to raise
the seatback.
3. Pull the head restraints up to their
normal positions.
PowerFold™Third Row Seats (If
equipped)
The third row power seat buttons are
located behind the third row seats on the
left-hand quarter trim panel.
E190928
NORMAL: Press to return the seat to the normal seating position.A
STOW: Press to stow the seat into the tub floor.B
153
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
FOLD: Press to fold down the seatback.C
RH / BOTH / LH: Press to select the normal, stow and fold modes to activate
the right-hand seat, the left-hand seat or both.
D
Note: The third row seat includes obstacle
detection that allows the seat to stop and
reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that
the obstacle can be removed.
Note: Pressing a different button while the
power seat feature is already being
performed may cause the first selected seat
movement to be cancelled. Allow the first
seat movement to be completed before
pressing a button for another function.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: In order to allow the seat to complete
the stowed position, do not place objects
under the seat before stowing. Remove all
objects from the seat and stowage tub.
Note: In the unlikely event that the third
row power seat stops prematurely or travels
to an unexpected position, press the FOLD
button (C) to reset the seat and return it to
a normal position.
These seats feature a power one-touch
operation that allows you fold and stow
the seats.
•The power fold seats work only when
the transmission is in park (P) and the
liftgate is open.
•If the ignition is off and the feature is
still running, the battery saver will turn
it off after 10 minutes. Press unlock on
the remote entry key transmitter to
reactivate the power seats or unlock it
with the keyless entry keypad. See
Remote Control (page 49).
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
•Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
154
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Rear Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
•Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch
to enable heating mode. When activated,
they will turn off automatically when you
turn the engine off.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)
Heated Seats
155
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
•Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Touch the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats only function when the
engine is running.
E146309
To operate the cooled seats:
Touch the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and
off. More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the cooled seats are on, the feature turns
itself off. You need to reactivate it.
Climate controlled seat air filter
replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is
not needed.
156
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. As well as being programmed for
garage doors, the system transmitter can
be programmed to operate entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door
locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
by calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
157
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away
from the HomeLink button you want
to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously,
press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. DO NOT release either one until
the HomeLink indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further
action is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed
yet. See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
158
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter
until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
159
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on
the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will change
from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want
to program. The indicator light on the
visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must
be changed out of program mode. To do
this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will
flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator
lights on the garage door opener motor
unit should now flash purple.
160
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and
the indicator light should blink slowly to
indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are
pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
161
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Do not use a power point for
operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect
use of the power points can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the power point and blow the
fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
•Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
•Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
•On the lower instrument panel.
•Inside the center console.
•On the rear of the center console.
•In the rear cargo area.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point will turn off when
the ignition is switched off or the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
E193395
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point cover may open to the right or upward.
162
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
•On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
•Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
•Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
•Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
•Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
•Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
•Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
163
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E193409
USB, or USB and SD card (if
equipped).
A
Power point.B
Cup holder.C
Hill descent control (if
equipped).
D
110 volt AC power point or USB
port (if equipped).
E
Rear climate controls (if
equipped).
F
110 volt AC power point / 230
volt AC power point (if
equipped).
G
USB smart charger (if equipped).H
Rear Seat Armrest
E190042
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
164
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)
E72128
0 (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
III (start) - cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
165
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Ignition Modes
E144447
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
•Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
•Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may
not start when the vehicle starts.
•Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the
engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15
minutes, you are limited to a 15-second
engine cranking time. You need to wait 60
minutes before you can crank the engine for
60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
•Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
•Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is on.
•Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
•Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with
a keyless ignition, see the following
instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
166
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
•The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
•The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
1
E198728
2
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 20
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
167
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the
engine if it has been idling for an extended
period. The ignition also turns off in order
to save battery power. Before your vehicle
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, your
vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
•You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
the brake or accelerator pedal.
•You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 101). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
•During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the
feature off for the current ignition cycle
only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
168
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
•Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
•Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
•Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
•Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords.
•Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
•Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
•Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
•Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
169
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
•Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
•Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
170
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel
capless fuel system), do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may
contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
•Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
•Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
•Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
•Be particularly careful if you are taking
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin
contact could cause an adverse
reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness may result.
If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience an adverse reaction.
171
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. We do not recommend fuels with
an octane rating below 87.
For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, to
provide improved performance, we
recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
•Diesel fuel.
•Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
•Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
•Fuels containing methanol.
•Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
•Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
•Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL QUALITY - E85
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of
87, or regular unleaded gasoline blended
with a maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow fuel filler
cap or the fuel tank filler pipe will have a
yellow housing or bezel. Some fuel stations
offer fuels posted as regular unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating below 87,
particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels
with octane levels below 87 are not
recommended.
172
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
•Diesel fuel.
•Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
•Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
•Fuels containing methanol.
•Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
•Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
•Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving
conditions while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
•Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine. If your vehicle is
out of fuel and on a steep slope, more
fuel may be required.
•You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
•Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
•Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
•Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel system filler neck. This
may damage the fuel system filler neck or
its seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
173
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 173).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they will not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages and remove the fuel tank
filler cap.
Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a
fuel tank filler cap.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or properly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank
and could lead to fuel overflowing.
174
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
•Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
•Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle (including the cargo area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
•Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position.
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
2. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
E156032
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle. Hold handle
higher during insertion for easier
access. Leave the fuel pump nozzle
fully inserted until you are done
pumping.
E154765
4. Remove the fuel filler nozzle and fully
close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the
tank. The fill pipe is equipped with a drain
hole. Excess fuel due to overfill may drain
through the drain hole and drip onto the
ground.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed,
a service engine warning lamp may appear
on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
175
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove
any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the
fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle
several times to allow the inlet to close
properly. This will dislodge any debris
preventing the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It
may take several driving cycles for the
message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after 4 or
more hours with the engine off) followed
by city or highway driving. Continuing to
drive with the message on may cause the
service engine soon lamp to turn on as
well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable
fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range.
•The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that can be added
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty
•The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 334). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.
•Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank
even when the fuel gauge reads empty.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
•Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
•Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
•Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of
driving (this is your engine’s break-in
period); a more accurate measurement is
obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles
(3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also,
fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel
gauge readings are not accurate ways to
measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least 3 to 5 tank fill ups, fill the
fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled).
176
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Keep a record for at least 1 month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
records during summer and winter show
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower
fuel economy.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
•Carrying unnecessary weight may
reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400
pounds [180 kilograms] of weight
carried).
•Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks) may reduce fuel economy.
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10
miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
•Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
•Close windows for high speed driving.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter that will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards. To make sure that the
catalytic converter and other emission
control components continue to work
properly:
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
•Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of
components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be the
equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company
parts in performance and durability.
177
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
•the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
•poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly
•the fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 174).
•driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness, and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
178
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, you may need to have
the vehicle serviced. See On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
may need to perform the following driving
cycle consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours without starting the engine. Then,
start the engine and complete the above
driving cycle. The engine must warm up to
its normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the engine until the
above driving cycle is complete. If the
vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you
will have to repeat the above driving cycle.
179
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the gearshift is
latched in park (P). Turn the ignition
to the off position and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than three seconds will limit
engine rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the button on the front
of the gearshift lever.
3. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
4. Release the button and your
transmission will remain in the selected
gear.
E142629
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
Sport (S)
Moving the gearshift lever to sport (S):
•Provides additional grade (engine)
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking.
•Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
•Gears are selected more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.
Grade Assist
Press the transmission control switch on
the side of the gearshift lever to activate
grade assist.
180
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
E146092
•Provides additional grade braking with
a combination of engine motoring and
high-voltage battery charging to help
maintain vehicle speed when
descending a grade.
•As your vehicle determines the amount
of engine motoring and high-voltage
battery charging, you may notice the
engine speed increasing and
decreasing to help maintain your
vehicle speed when descending a
grade.
•The grade assist lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated.
E144523
The grade assist lamp will
appear in the instrument cluster
when grade assist is turned on.
Press the transmission control switch
again to return to drive (D).
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission
Your SelectShift automatic transmission
gives you the ability to manually change
gears.
If equipped with a toggle on the
gearshift lever:
E142629
•Press the (+) button to upshift.
•Press the (-) button to downshift.
If equipped with steering wheel
paddles:
E144821
•Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
•Pull the left paddle (-) to downshift.
With your vehicle in drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel. You can achieve extensive
manual control by moving the gearshift
lever to sport (S).
The system determines when temporary
manual control is no longer in use and
returns to automatic control.
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
181
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Upshifts when accelerating (recom-
mended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6
The instrument cluster will display the
selected gear that you are currently in and
a shift indicator arrow to assist in
optimizing shifting.
SelectShift will automatically make some
shifts for you in the event that your engine
speed is running at too high, or too low an
RPM.
Note: Engine damage may occur if
excessive engine revving is held without
shifting.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking the vehicle out of park
which means the vehicle can roll
freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheel chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Use the brake shift interlock lever to move
the gearshift lever from the park position
in the event of an electrical malfunction or
if your vehicle has a dead battery.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition off before performing this
procedure.
1. Insert a screwdriver (or similar tool)
between the shifter bezel and the top
finish panel.
2. Use the tool to unsnap the shifter bezel
from the finish panel.
E142627
3. Locate the white lever located on the
left side of the shifter.
4. Using the tool move the white lever
towards the rear of the shifter.
5. While holding the white lever in the rear
position, move the shifter from the park
position.
6. Press the shifter bezel back into the top
finish panel until it snaps back into
position.
7. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle
and release the parking brake.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
182
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
183
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
This system is a proactive system. It has
the ability to anticipate wheel slip and
transfer torque to the rear wheels before
slip occurs. Even when wheel slip is not
present, the system is continuously making
adjustments to the torque distribution, in
an attempt to improve straight line and
cornering behavior, both on and off road.
The system automatically turns on every
time you switch the ignition on.
All components of the system are sealed
and do not require maintenance.
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
WARNING
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity such as utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity.
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are
not designed for cornering at speeds as
high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these
vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
The intelligent 4WD system continuously
monitors vehicle conditions and
automatically adjusts the power
distribution between the front and rear
wheels. It combines transparent
all-surface operation with highly capable
four-wheel drive.
The 4WD system is always active and
requires no driver input. It is capable of
handling all road conditions, including
street and highway driving as well as
off-road and winter driving. The driver can
optimize more 4WD control by moving the
terrain management switch for the correct
terrain. See Using Terrain Response
(page 195).
Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display when an 4WD
system fault is present See Information
Messages (page 115). An 4WD system fault
will cause the 4WD system to default to
front-wheel drive only mode. When this
warning message is displayed, have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer
Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display if the 4WD system
has overheated See Information
Messages (page 115). This condition may
occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme
conditions with excessive wheel slip, such
as deep sand. To resume normal 4WD
function as soon as possible, stop the
vehicle in a safe location and stop the
engine for at least 10 minutes. After the
engine has been restarted and the 4WD
system has adequately cooled, the warning
message will turn off and normal 4WD
function will return.
Do not use a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided. If the
mini-spare tire is installed, the 4WD system
may disable automatically and enter
front-wheel drive only mode to protect
driveline components. This condition will
be indicated by a warning in the
information display See Information
Messages (page 115). If there is a warning
message in the information display from
using the spare tire, this indicator should
turn off after reinstalling the repaired or
replaced normal road tire and cycling the
ignition off and on. It is recommended to
184
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire
as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire
sizes between the front and rear axles
could cause the 4WD system to stop
functioning and default to front-wheel
drive or damage the 4WD system.
How Your Vehicle Differs From
Other Vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the
area. To maintain steering and braking
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving In Special Conditions With
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Note: 4WD vehicles are equipped for driving
on sand, snow, mud and rough roads and
have operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional
vehicles, both on and off the highway.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
•Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
•Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
•If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle
back onto the pavement only after
reducing your speed. Do not turn the
steering wheel too sharply while
returning to the road surface.
•It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
•It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors,
with minor damage to your vehicle
rather than attempt a sudden return to
the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control
or rollover. Remember, your safety and
the safety of others should be your
primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is in
P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position or turn the vehicle off using the
start/stop button and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
185
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to
disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll
Stability Control™ system while
attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
•In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid
"over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn the
steering wheel only as rapidly and as
far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering will
result in less vehicle control, not more.
Additionally, smooth variations of the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes
in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid
abrupt steering, acceleration or braking
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury. Use all
available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
•In the event of an emergency stop,
avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel
movements.
•If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e., from concrete
to gravel) there will be a change in the
way the vehicle responds to a
maneuver (steering, acceleration or
braking). Again, avoid these abrupt
inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and
cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
point that assistance may be required from
another vehicle. Remember, you may be
able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage your vehicle.
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the hubs (if possible) and proceed
slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
186
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will
use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill
without seeing what conditions are on the
other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turn around
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.
187
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
4WD vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,
it won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Since your vehicle is
equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not
“pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 189).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load
carrying capability. For this reason, Ford
Motor Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (such as lowering
kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise
the center of gravity can make it more likely
the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss
of control. Ford Motor Company
recommends that caution be used with
any vehicle equipped with a high load or
device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect driver and passenger safety.
Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis
components is recommended if the vehicle
is subjected to off-highway usage.
188
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and an
authorized dealer should check them. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, an
authorized dealer should check your vehicle.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 304).
E138644
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 96).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Switch the engine off, move the
transmission to park (P) and apply the
parking brake. Inspect the accelerator
pedal and the area around it for any items
or debris that may be obstructing its
movement. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at
which you press the brake pedal. It
provides maximum braking efficiency as
long as you press the pedal. Emergency
brake assist can reduce stopping distances
in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the anti-lock braking system may
be disabled. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E138644
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates with the parking
brake released, have your brake
system serviced immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
•You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
•Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
•You take corners too fast.
•The road surface is poor.
189
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is
locked in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury.
To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake. Failure to leave your vehicle securely
parked may lead to a crash or injury. See
Parking Brake (page 190).
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The system will turn off if a
malfunction is apparent or if you rev
the engine excessively. Failure to
take care may result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient drive to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
Note: The system only functions when you
bring your vehicle to a complete standstill
in an uphill gear (for example, drive when
facing uphill or reverse when facing
downhill).
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed.
190
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
191
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control
light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
Using the Information Display
Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 101).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
The switch for the stability control system
and traction control system is on the
instrument panel.
Use the switch to turn the system off or
on.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes
when a driving condition activates either
of the systems.
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on:
•When you switch the traction control
system off.
•If a problem occurs in either of the
systems.
192
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
•The stability and traction control light
flashes.
•Your vehicle slows down.
•Reduced engine power.
•A vibration in the brake pedal.
•The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
•If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the systems
applies higher brake forces.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
Curve Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to follow the road when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. Curve
Control operates by reducing engine power
and, if necessary, applying brakes to one
or more of the wheels individually.
193
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 192).
E72903
AA
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC®)
The system automatically activates when
you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac
with RSC system cannot be completely
turned off, but the electronic stability
control and roll stability control portions
of the system are disabled when the
transmission is in position R. You can turn
off the traction control portion of the
system independently. See Using
Traction Control (page 192).
194
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
USING TERRAIN RESPONSE
The terrain management system optimizes
drivability and comfort as well as
maximizing traction while operating on
different types of terrain.
Turn the control located on the center
console to choose between the following
modes:
E193313
3
2
1
4
Grass/Gravel/Snow mode
should be selected where a firm
surface is covered with loose or
slippery material such as packed
snow, ice, water, grass, or a thin
layer of gravel or sand. For deep
1
gravel or sand, select Sand
mode. If the vehicle cannot gain
traction in deep snow, switching
off the traction control system
may help (switch traction
control back on when you regain
traction). See Using Traction
Control (page 192).
Sand mode should be selected
in soft dry sand or deep gravel. If
crossing wet sand that may be
sufficiently deep enough for the
wheels to sink into the surface,
select Mud/Ruts mode.
2
Mud/Ruts mode should be
selected for muddy, rutted, soft
or uneven terrain.
3
Normal mode is for on-road
conditions and should be
selected before driving on
surfaces which are similar to a
hard road surface or once the
need for a special mode has
passed. Select Normal mode
when towing a trailer.
4
Note: The Sand and Mud/Ruts modes are
for off-road use only.
Note: The curve control portion of the
AdvanceTrac® system is unavailable when
you select Sand or Mud/Ruts.
If the system becomes inoperable,
selecting some modes may not be possible
and a message displays. If it becomes
inoperable due to a system malfunction,
all of the mode indicators on the control
turn off and one of the following messages
appears in the information display:
TERRAIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
FAULT: Cycling the key may clear the
fault. If key cycling does not work, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer.
MODE CHANGE NOT ACCEPTED,
RETRY: A mode change cannot be made
at the time of driver request. Try the mode
change again.
195
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
USING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL
Principle of operation
WARNINGS
Hill descent control cannot control
descent in all surface conditions and
circumstances, such as ice or
extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle
control, crash or serious injury.
Hill descent control does not provide
hill hold at zero miles per hour (0
kilometers per hour). When stopped,
the parking brake must be applied or the
vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it
may roll away.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep grades in various surface
conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). Above
20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but descent speed cannot be set
or maintained.
Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after a period of sustained
use. The amount of time that the feature
can remain active before cooling varies
with conditions. The system provides a
warning in the message center and a chime
sounds when the system is about to
disengage for cooling. At this time,
manually apply the brakes as needed to
maintain descent speed.
Using hill descent control
Press and release the hill
descent button located in the
center of the terrain
management control. A light in the control
illuminates and a chime sounds when this
feature activates.
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the
desired speed. To decrease descent speed,
press the brake pedal until you reach the
desired speed.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
you reach the desired descent speed,
remove your feet from the pedals and hill
descent control maintains the chosen
vehicle speed.
Note: You may observe noise from the ABS
pump motor during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.
Hill descent modes
•At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
When you press the Hill Descent
Control and Hill Descent Control
activates, HILL DESCENT CONTROL
ACTIVE appears in the message
center for several seconds.
•At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
When you press the Hill Descent
Control switch and conditions are not
correct for hill descent activation, the
Hill Descent Control system enables,
the light on the button is solid and HILL
DESCENT CONTROL READY
displays in the message center for
several seconds.
196
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
•At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h):
When you press the Hill Descent
Control switch, the Hill Descent Control
system enables, the light on the button
illuminates and FOR HILL CNTRL, 20
MPH OR LESS displays in the
message center for several seconds.
•For Hill Descent Control to enable, the
vehicle must be in a drive gear or (R)
Reverse. If the vehicle is in P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and you press the button,
FOR HILL CNTRL, SELECT GEAR
displays in the message center for
several seconds.
Refer to the Information Displays for
additional Hill Descent Control messages.
See Information Messages (page 115).
197
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations
of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when
moving on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Certain objects with surfaces that absorb
ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's
parking aid systems, traffic control
systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement
weather, air brakes, and external motors
and fans may also affect the function of
the sensing system; this may include
reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to
provide a warning to assist the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging your vehicle. The system may
not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 54).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing
system may detect that add-on device and
therefore provide warnings. It is suggested
that you disable the rear sensing system
when you attach an add-on device to your
vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 101).
Note: On vehicles with front parking aid you
can use the parking aid switch to switch the
system off.
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 115).
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
198
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
•Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
•As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
•If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are greyed
out.
FRONT PARKING AID
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object,
a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning
tone repeat rate increases. The warning
tone sounds continuously when an object
is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front
bumper.
199
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The indicator displays:
•As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
•If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are greyed
out.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
front sensing system provides audio
warnings when your vehicle is moving and
the detected obstacle is moving towards
your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary,
the audio warning will be stopped after 2
seconds.
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any
other forward gear (for example, low (L),
sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio and visual warnings when
your vehicle is moving below a speed of
7 mph (12 km/h) and an obstacle is located
inside the detection area. Once the vehicle
is stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the
obstacles detected are within 12 in
(30 cm), the visual indication remains on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the
system provides visual indication only
when your vehicle is moving at 7 mph
(12 km/h) or below and an obstacle is
located inside the detection area. Once
your vehicle is stationary, the visual
indication will stop after 4 seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM
The side sensing system uses the front and
rear side sensors to detect and map
obstacles that are near to the sides of your
vehicle. The side sensors are active when
the transmission is in any position other
than park (P).
Note: Obstacles that enter the side
detection area without being detected and
mapped by the front or rear side sensors will
not be detected.
E187810
Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from
the sides of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object close
to the side of your vehicle, an audible
warning sounds. As the object comes
closer to the side of your vehicle, the rate
of the audible warning increases. The rate
of the audible warning varies depending
on whether the obstacle is inside or outside
of the driving path of your vehicle.
200
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
E190459
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
As the distance to the obstacle decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon. If there is no
obstacle detected, the distance indicator
blocks show greyed out.
When you shift to reverse (R), the side
sensing system provides audible and visual
distance indication when your vehicle is
moving and obstacles are detected within
12 in (30 cm), or when obstacles are
detected within 12–24 in (30–60 cm) and
are inside the driving path of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the audible
warning stops after two seconds.
Note: Visual distance indication remains
on when the transmission is in reverse (R).
When you shift to drive (D) or any other
forward gear, for example, low (L), sport
(S) or any forward gear in manual
transmission, the side sensing system
provides audible and visual distance
indication when your vehicle is moving at
7 mph (12 km/h) or below and obstacles
are detected within 12 in (30 cm), or when
obstacles are detected within 12–24 in
(30–60 cm) and are inside the driving path
of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle
the audible warning stops after 2 seconds
and the visual distance indication stops
after 4 seconds.
Note: If the obstacle remains within 12 in
(30 cm) visual distance indication remains
on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side
sensing system only provides visual
distance indication when your vehicle is
moving at 7 mph (12 km/h) or below, for
example when moving on a slope, and
obstacles are detected within 12 in
(30 cm). When you stop your vehicle the
visual distance indication stops after 4
seconds.
If the side sensing system is not available,
the side distance indicator blocks will not
be present.
The side sensing system is not available
under the following condition:
•If you switch the traction control
system off.
The side sensing system may not be
available until you have driven
approximately the length of your vehicle
in order for the system to reinitialize if:
•You switch the ignition on, off and back
on.
•Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
201
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
•The anti-lock brake system is
activated.
•The traction control system is
activated.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular
Parking, Park Out Assist
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. You are
responsible at all times for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required by
grabbing the steering wheel or pushing the
active park assist button.
The system detects an available parallel
or perpendicular parking space and
automatically steers your vehicle into the
space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
park your vehicle.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system.
Park Out Assist automatically steers your
vehicle out of a parallel parking space
(hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
enter traffic.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during a park assist maneuver.
The system may not correctly operate in
any of the following conditions:
•You use a spare tire or a tire
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
•You use a unauthorized tire size.
•You try to park on a tight curve.
•Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist).
•The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck).
•The weather conditions are poor
(heavy rain, snow, fog, etc).
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors
can affect the system's accuracy. Do not
clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference (motorcycle
exhaust, truck air brakes or horns).
Do not use the system if:
•You have attached a foreign object
(bike rack or trailer) to the front or rear
of your vehicle or close to the sensors.
•You have attached an overhanging
object (surfboard) to the roof.
•A foreign object damages or obstructs
the front or rear bumper or side
sensors.
•The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
202
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Using Active Park Assist - Parallel
Parking
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the
center stack once.
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h) the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left-hand side or
right-hand side of your vehicle.
A
E130107
Note: If the direction indicators are not
used, the system defaults to the passenger
side of your vehicle.
Note: The system passively searches for
parking spaces prior to pressing the button,
so activating the system is still possible
while passing a parking space.
When the system finds a suitable space,
it displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the screen. If your vehicle
is moving very slowly, you may need to pull
forward a short distance before the system
is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
Note: Active park assist may not detect
street furniture and other items. You must
make sure the selected space is suitable for
parking.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel as possible to
the other vehicles while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse ( R), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
The system displays instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space.
203
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
E130108
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist -
Perpendicular Parking
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the
center stack twice.
The system displays a message and a
corresponding graphic to indicate it is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to select searching
either to the left-hand side or right-hand
side of your vehicle.
Note: If you do not make a selection the
system will default to the passenger's side.
E186193
When the system finds a suitable space,
it displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the screen. If your vehicle
is moving very slowly, you may need to pull
forward a short distance before the system
is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
4.9 ft (1.5 m) and as perpendicular as
possible to the other vehicles while passing
a parking space.
204
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
E186191
When you shift the transmission into
reverse ( R), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
The system displays instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space.
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist - Park Out
Assist
E146186
While your vehicle is at rest in a
parallel parking space, press the
active park assist button.
The system displays a message requesting
an indication of direction. Use the direction
indicator to signal which side of your
vehicle you want to exit the parking space.
E188012
205
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system determines the clearance to
the front and rear of your vehicle and
automatically steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space (hands-free) while
you control the accelerator, gearshift and
brakes. The system visually and audibly
guides you to enter traffic.
After the system has directed your vehicle
past the adjacent vehicle or object, it
guides you to take control of the steering
to complete the exit from the parking spot.
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the
neighboring parked vehicle is high off the
ground (for example, a bus, tow truck or
flatbed truck).
Note: If the clearance in front of your
vehicle allows easy departure, the Park Out
Assist feature might not be available.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
in exiting perpendicular parking spaces,
damages to your vehicle may occur.
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
Deactivating the Active Park
Assist Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
•Pressing the active park assist button
twice.
•Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
•Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search.
•Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
automatic steering.
•Switching off the traction control
system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
•Traction control has activated.
•There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied
by a tone. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse ( R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
206
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered senors
can affect the system's functionality.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (0.4 m) away.
The transmission is in reverse ( R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel and 19 mph (30 km/h)
for perpendicular parking.
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward with
reverse [R] selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage
into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
207
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop your vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the luggage
compartment door is ajar. If the
luggage compartment door is ajar, the
camera will be out of position and the
video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
•Active guidelines (if equipped): Show
the intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
•Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
•Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
208
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
•Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
•Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner. You can also use the rear
washer to clean the camera. See Rear
Window Wiper and Washers (page
78).
•The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelines (If equipped)A
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change the
steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
209
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle may not
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Camera System Settings
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the multifunctional display
when the transmission is not in reverse (R):
Main Menu
Settings
Vehicle
Camera Settings
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Vehicles equipped with MyFord Touch™
The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.
The coverage area is up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There is decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
E130178
For additional information of the zone
coverage and the rear sensing system. See
Rear Parking Aid (page 198).
210
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
•Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
•You shift your vehicle into park (P).
180 DEGREE PARKING AID
CAMERA
WARNINGS
The camera system is a supplement
system that still requires the driver
to use it in conjunction with looking
out the windows, and checking the interior
and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
You may not see objects that are
close to either corner of the bumper
or under the bumper due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
Use caution when turning camera
features ON or OFF while out of park
(P). Make sure your vehicle is not
moving.
E188845
The front view camera is located in the
grille.
The front view camera provides a video
image of the area in front of your vehicle.
Note: The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to your vehicle's orientation
or road condition.
Note: The front view camera will switch off
if your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h). You will have to switch the
system back on by using the camera system
button once below the speed threshold.
Note: Additional camera information can
be found in the rear view camera section.
See Rear View Camera (page 208).
Using the 180 degree camera
system
The 180 degree camera system consists
of front and rear cameras. The system:
•Allows you to see what is directly in
front or behind your vehicle.
•Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
•Provides visibility during parking
maneuvers.
E188847
The camera system button is
located on the audio unit and
allows you to toggle through
different camera views.
211
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: The camera system may not operate
correctly if mud, water or debris obstructs
the camera's view. You can clean the lens
with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner or by using your front or rear washer.
See Wipers and Washers (page 77).
Camera Views
Press the camera button to toggle
between different views.
•Normal Rear View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle
when your vehicle is in reverse (R).
•Expanded Rear View: Provides an
expanded 180 degree image of what
is directly behind your vehicle when
your vehicle is in reverse (R).
•Normal Front View: Provides an
image of what is directly in front your
vehicle when your vehicle is in neutral
(N) or drive (D).
•Expanded Front View: Provides an
expanded 180 degree image of what
is directly in front your vehicle when
your vehicle is in neutral (N) or drive
(D).
212
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes but a warning displays.
E200995
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator will change color.
Note: Cruise control disengages if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
Changing the Set Speed
•Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select kph as the display
measurement in the information
display, the set speed changes in
approximately 1 kph increments. When
you select mph as the display
measurement in the information
display, the set speed changes in
approximately 1 mph increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CAN or tap the brake
pedal. You will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
213
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system
is in stand by mode or switch the ignition
off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
road.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or
when the road surface is slippery.
This could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
when towing a trailer that has trailer
brakes. The auto-brake component
of the adaptive cruise control system does
not operate the trailer brakes. Using
adaptive cruise control when towing a
trailer that has trailer brakes may result in
the loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
WARNINGS
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failing to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
E200996
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Press and release ON.
E144529
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
E164805
The current gap setting and SET will also
appear.
214
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. A green indicator light, current gap
setting and your desired set speed
appear in the instrument cluster.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
E164805
5. A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is
a vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance.
A vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Your vehicle will maintain a consistant gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
•The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
•The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
•Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
•You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The brake lamps
automatically turn on when the system
applies the brakes. The maximum braking
which the system applies is limited. You
can override the system by applying the
brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an
audible warning sounds while the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Setting the Gap Distance
You can decrease or increase the gap
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you by pressing the gap control.
You can select four gap settings.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
215
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
E201206
Gap decrease.A
Gap increase.B
E164805
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the graphic. Five gap settings are
available.
The gap setting is time dependent and the
distance automatically adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Adaptive cruise control gap settings
Dynamic beha-
vior
GapTime gap,
seconds
Graphic display,
bars indicated
between
vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport31 (28)1162 (100)
Normal43 (39)1.4262 (100)
Normal55 (50)1.8362 (100)
Comfort67 (61)2.2462 (100)
Each time you start the vehicle, the system
selects the last chosen gap.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CAN or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Overriding the System
WARNING
Whenever the driver is overriding the
system by pressing the accelerator
pedal, the system does not
automatically apply the brakes to maintain
separation from any vehicle ahead.
You can override the set speed and gap by
pressing the accelerator pedal.
E144529
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the lead vehicle
graphic does not show in the
information display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
216
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
•Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 2 km/h increments.
When you select mph as the display
measurement in the information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 1 mph increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the
desired set speed shows on the
information display. The vehicle speed
will gradually change to the selected
speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES. The vehicle returns
to the previously set speed and gap setting.
The set speed displays continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Automatic Cancellation
The system does not operate below
12 mph (20 km/h). An audible warning
sounds and the automatic braking releases
if the vehicle drops below this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear position
when the system is active in situations
such as prolonged downhill driving on
steep grades, for example in mountainous
areas. The system needs additional engine
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent them from overheating.
Note: An audible warning sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool down. The system functions
normally again when the brakes have cooled
down.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
Press and release the OFF button when
the system is in stand by mode or switch
the ignition off.
Note: The set speed memory erases when
you switch off the system.
Detection Issues
WARNING
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
some situations. The lead vehicle graphic
does not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
217
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. The driver should stay
alert and intervene when necessary.
If something hits the front of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. See an authorized
dealer to have the radar checked for
correct operation.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
•A blocked sensor.
•High brake temperature.
•A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E145632
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is located on the lower grille. The
system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and
does not function when something
obstructs the radar signals.
218
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message displaying.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning and not
be blocked. This can happen, for example,
when driving in sparse rural environments.
A false blocked condition self clears or
clears after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
due to slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have
selected and apply the brakes when
necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, the system does
not automatically respond to lead vehicles
and automatic braking does not activate.
219
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed
to aid you. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment.
You are still responsible to drive with due
care and attention.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
will be active at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h). When below the activation
speed, the information display will inform
the driver that the system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the cluster
display.
USING DRIVER ALERT
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 101).
When activated, the system will monitor
your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system has two stages. At
first, the system issues a temporary
warning that you need to take a rest. This
message will only appear for a short time.
If the system detects further reduction in
driving alertness, it may issue another
warning that will remain in the information
display for a longer time. You can press OK
on the steering wheel control to clear the
warning.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
•Switching the ignition off and on.
•Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.
If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow, spray can all
limit sensor performance.
220
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
WARNINGS
Large contrasts in lighting can limit
sensor performance.
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
The vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer for inspection if
damage occurs in the immediate
area surrounding the sensor.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short
period, the system will alert you to put your
hands on the steering wheel. The system
may detect a light grip or touch on the
steering wheel as hands off driving.
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out
of your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey
it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system.
E144813
Press the button located on the
left steering wheel stalk to
switch the system on or off.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. To view or adjust the settings,
See General Information (page 101). The
system stores the last-known selection for
each of these settings. You do not need to
readjust your settings each time you turn
on the system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
E165516
221
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center when
the system detects an unintended lane
departure.
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance
steering torque input toward the lane
center. If your vehicle continues drifting out
of the lane, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
•Low
•Normal
•High
System Display
E151660
When you switch on the system, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
markings will display in the information
display. If you select aid mode when you
switch on the system, a separate white
icon will also appear or in some vehicles
arrows will display with the lane markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings will change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:
•Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
•The turn indicator is active.
•Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
222
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
•The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
•The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain
or fog), traffic conditions (following a
large vehicle that is blocking or
shadowing the lane), or vehicle
conditions (poor headlamp
illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
•Quick braking.
•Fast acceleration.
•Using the turn signal indicator.
•Evasive steering maneuver.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
The last Alert warning or Aid intervention occurred a short time ago
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
223
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING
Do not use the system as a
replacement for using the mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. You should only use the
system as an aid. It is not a replacement
for careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)
is a convenience feature that assists you
in detecting vehicles that may have
entered the blind spot zone (A). The
detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the rear bumper. The system
is designed to alert you if other vehicles
enter the blind spot zone when driving.
224
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It's only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind zones.
Note: Vehicles that pass through the blind
spot zone quickly (typically less than 2
seconds) will not trigger the alert.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above approximately
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P)
or provide any additional warning when a
turn signal is on.
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The system displays a yellow warning
indicator located in the exterior mirrors.
Note: It will dim when the ambient light
decreases.
System Sensors
WARNING
Prior to the system recognizing a
blocked condition and issuing a
warning, the number of missed
objects will increase.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage
warning with no blockage present; this is
rare and known as a false blockage warning.
A false blocked condition either
self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.
E205199
The system uses radar sensors which are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
areas, this can cause degraded system
performance.
225
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor or low visibility will
appear in the information display along
with a warning indicator. You can clear the
information display warning but the
warning indicator will remain illuminated.
When you remove a blockage, you can
reset the system in two ways:
•While driving, the system detects at
least two objects.
•You cycle the ignition from on to off
and then back on.
If the blockage is still present after the key
cycle and driving in traffic, check again for
a blockage.
Reasons for messages being displayed
Clean the fascia area in front
of the radar or remove the
obstruction.
The radar
surface is
dirty or
obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for
a few minutes to allow the
radar to detect passing
vehicles so it can clear the
blocked state.
The radar
surface is
not dirty or
obstructed
No action required. The
system automatically resets
to an unblocked state once
the rainfall or snowfall rate
decreases or stops. Do not
use the Blind Spot Informa-
tion System in these condi-
tions.
Heavy rain-
fall or
snowfall
interferes
with the
radar
signals
Detection Limitations
There may be instances where the system
will not always detect vehicles entering
and exiting the blind spot zone.
Instances which may cause non-detection:
•Debris build up on the rear bumper
panels in the area of the sensors.
•Certain maneuvering of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind spot
zone.
•Vehicles passing through the blind spot
zone at high speed.
•Severe weather conditions.
•Several vehicles passing through the
blind spot zone following each other
closely.
False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a trailer tow
module approved by us, the system will
detect a connected trailer and turn off. For
non-factory equipped tow bars, you may
want to turn the Blind Spot Information
System off manually.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the system that
illuminates the alert indicator with no
vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
Detection Errors
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the Blind Spot
Information System warning indicator will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display.
All other system faults will display only
with a message in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 115).
226
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Switching the Systems Off and On
You can temporarily switch off the Blind
Spot Information System in the
information display. See General
Information (page 101). When you switch
off the Blind Spot Information System, you
will not receive alerts and the information
display will display a system off message.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
will remember the last selected on or off
setting.
The Blind Spot Information System cannot
be switched off when MyKey is used. See
Principle of Operation (page 54).
You can have the Blind Spot Information
System switched off permanently at an
authorized dealer. Once switched off, the
system can only be switched back on at
an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
Cross traffic alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross traffic alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), cross
traffic alert turns off.
Note: Cross traffic alert is designed to
detect vehicles that approach with a speed
up to 37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage
decreases when the sensors are partially,
mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowly
helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
227
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage decreases when parking at
shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.
System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts
E142442
Cross traffic alert illuminates an amber
alert indicator in the outside mirror on the
side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. Cross traffic alert
also sounds an audible alert and a
message appears in the information
display indicating a vehicle is coming from
the right or left. Cross traffic alert works
with the reverse sensing system that
sounds its own series of tones. See
Principle of Operation (page 198).
System Sensors
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
areas, as this can cause degraded system
performance.
System Limitations
Cross traffic alert has its own limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
area may limit vehicle detection.
228
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
The following are other situations that may
limit the cross traffic alert system
performance:
•Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
•Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
•Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the cross traffic alert off.
If your vehicle has a tow bar but no factory
equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the cross traffic alert
off manually. Operating cross traffic alert
with a trailer attached will cause poor cross
traffic alert system performance.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If cross traffic alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor, a message will
appear in the information display. See
General Information (page 101).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch cross traffic
alert off in the information display. See
General Information (page 101). When
you switch cross traffic alert off, you will
not receive alerts and the information
display will display a system off message.
Note: The cross traffic alert system always
switches on whenever the ignition is
switched on and ready to provide
appropriate alerts when the transmission is
in reverse (R). Cross Traffic Alert will not
remember the last selected on or off setting.
You can have cross traffic alert switched
off permanently at an authorized dealer.
Once switched off permanently, the
system can only be switched back on at
an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
229
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•Correct tire pressures.
•Uneven tire wear.
•Loose or worn suspension
components.
•Loose or worn steering components.
•Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
This system is an extra driving aid. It
does not replace your attention and
judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail
to press the brake pedal when necessary,
you may collide with another vehicle.
The Pre-Collision Assist system with
brake support cannot help prevent
all collisions. Do not rely on this
system to replace your judgment and the
need to maintain correct distance and
speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of your vehicle.
Note: The Pre-Collision Assist system is
active at speeds above approximately
5.0 mph (8 km/h).
E156130
The system alerts you of certain collision
risks. The system's sensor detects your
vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.
E156131
230
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
When your vehicle rapidly approaches
another vehicle, a red warning light flashes
and a tone sounds.
The brake support system assists you in
reducing any collision speed by
pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of
collision continues to increases after the
audio-visual warning, the brake support
prepares the brake system for rapid
braking. The system does not
automatically activate the brakes, but if
the brake pedal is pressed even lightly, the
brakes apply full stopping power.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System
WARNING
The Pre-Collision Assist system’s
brake support reduces collision
speed only if you brake your vehicle
before any collision. As in any typical
braking situation, you must press your
brake pedal.
You can adjust the warning system's
sensitivity through your information
display. See General Information (page
101).
Note: When possible, the manufacturer
recommends using the highest sensitivity
setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can
reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced
sensitivity causes fewer and later system
warnings. See General Information (page
101).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
If a blocked sensor message appears in the
information display, dirt, water, or an object
is blocking the sensor. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. If anything blocks the
sensor, your vehicle cannot see through
the sensor, and the pre-collision assist
system will not work. Possible causes for
the blocked sensor message and corrective
actions are listed below.
231
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
ActionCause
Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the
obstruction
The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty
or obstructed
Wait a short time. The radar may take
several minutes to reset after you remove
the obstruction
The surface of the radar sensor cover is
clean but the message remains in the
display
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Shortly after weather condi-
tions improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air
interferes with the radar signals
The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
arily disabled. Shortly after weather condi-
tions improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Swirling water, snow or ice on the road
surface interferes with the radar signals
System Limitations
WARNING
The Pre-Collision Assist system’s
brake support only reduces collision
speed if you first apply your brakes.
You must brake as you would in any typical
braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
•Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
•Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
•Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
•Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
•Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
•Small distance to vehicle ahead.
•Large steering wheel and pedal
movements (very active driving style).
Damage to the front end of your vehicle
may alter the radar sensor's coverage area.
This may result in missed or false collision
warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
your radar sensor for proper coverage and
operation.
232
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
Cargo Management System (If
Equipped)
E142445
The system is located in the floor of the
cargo area. Lift the handle to open.
Adjustable Load Floor (If Equipped)
E142446
Vehicles with the standard size spare tire
can adjust the load floor to two positions.
The front of the load floor can be placed
either on (for high position) or below (for
low position) the ledges behind the rear
seats. The rear of the load floor always sits
on the two small shelves located on the
liftgate trim.
CARGO NETS (If Equipped)
WARNING
This net is not designed to restrain
objects during a collision or heavy
braking.
The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area. Attach the net to the
anchors provided. Repeat the attachment
on both sides of the vehicle.
E204323
233
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
LUGGAGE COVERS
WARNINGS
Make sure that the posts are properly
latched in mounting features. The
cover may cause injury in a sudden
stop or accident if it is not securely
installed.
Do not place any objects on the
cargo area shade. They may obstruct
your vision or strike occupants of
your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash.
Use the cargo shade to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
E142447
Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the
mounting features located behind the rear
seat on the rear trim panels to install the
cargo shade.
To operate the cargo shade:
1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade
rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support rod
into the retention slots located on the
rear quarter trim panels.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low
center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Take
extra precautions, such as slower speeds
and increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the crossbars, is:
•100 lb (45 kg) for vehicles without a
moonroof.
•45 lb (20 kg) for vehicles with a
moonroof.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars
designed specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
Thumbwheel Kit
E203659
234
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
A thumbwheel kit is included in your
vehicle for tying light loads to your roof.
The kit is located in the glovebox.
Make sure to check that the thumbwheels
are tight each time you add or remove load
from the roof rack, and periodically while
traveling. Make sure that the load is secure
before traveling.
Note: There may be snap caps in the side
rail, which must be removed before
installing the thumbwheels. These caps can
be removed by using a T25 torx tool or a
similar tool.
Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped)
Note: For less wind noise and better
aerodynamics, only install the crossbars
when you need them for carrying cargo.
Follow the steps to reposition or remove the
rear crossbar. You can remove the front
crossbar fasteners by unscrewing the
assembly.
E203063
1. Remove the crossbar bolts at both
sides of the front crossbar by using the
supplied torx tool or a similar tool.
2. Remove the crossbar by sliding the
ends off of the side rails.
3. Move the crossbar to the new side rail
position and slide onto rail.
4. Replace and tighten the bolts at both
sides of the crossbar by using the
supplied torx tool or a similar tool.
Note: There may be snap caps in the new
side rail position, which must be removed
before installing the crossbar. These caps
can be removed by using the supplied torx
tool or a similar tool.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum
return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for
determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
235
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by
the assembly plant. If you install
any aftermarket or
authorized-dealer installed
equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E210944
236
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E210945
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight - includes all
weight added to the Base Curb
Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing,
trailer tongue load or king pin
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) including
vehicle curb weight and all
payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
237
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -
is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus
cargo, plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers
and cargo). It is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The Gross Vehicle Weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
Example only:
E198828
238
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
E143819
GCW GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus
the weight of the fully loaded
trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including
all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must
never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight - is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow. It assumes a
vehicle with mandatory options,
driver and front passenger weight
(150 pounds [68 kilograms]
each), no cargo weight (internal
or external) and a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer) for more
detailed information.
239
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel
King Pin Weight - refers to the
amount of the weight that a trailer
pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 pound
(2268 kilogram) conventional
trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
0.15 to obtain a proper tongue
load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an
11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth
wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
0.25 to obtain a proper king pin
load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds
(782 to 1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to the vehicle
and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
240
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position.
241
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, should be
taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo
and people than most passenger
cars. Depending upon the type
and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may
raise the center of gravity of the
vehicle.
242
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See the Fuses
chapter.
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
•Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
•Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
•Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
•Select a tow bar with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
235).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
243
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine
torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer
begins to sway, the stability control
warning lamp flashes and a message
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 115). Slow
your vehicle down, pull safely to the side
of the road and check for correct load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page
233).
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Be sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 20 feet² (1.86
meters²) if your vehicle can tow a
class I trailer or 40 feet² (3.72
meters²) if your vehicle can tow a
class III trailer.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)
starting at the 1000 foot (300
meter) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
244
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Your vehicle may tow a class I or
III trailer provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal
to the maximum trailer weight
listed for your vehicle
configuration on the following
chart.
Maximum trailer
weight
Maximum GCWREngine
2000 lb (907 kg)6900 lb (3130 kg)
2.3L GTDI 2WD1
2000 lb (907 kg)6900 lb (3130 kg)
3.5L TiVCT 2WD1
3000 lb (1361 kg)7950 lb (3606 kg)
2.3L GTDI 2WD2
5000 lb (2268 kg)3
9950 lb (4513 kg)
3.5L TiVCT 2WD2
2000 lb (907 kg)7100 lb (3221 kg)
2.3L GTDI 4WD1
2000 lb (907 kg)7100 lb (3221 kg)
3.5L TiVCT 4WD1
3000 lb (1361 kg)8150 lb (3697 kg)
2.3L GTDI 4WD2
5000 lb (2268 kg)10150 lb (4604 kg)
3.5L TiVCT 4WD2
5000 lb (2268 kg)10400 lb (4717 kg)
3.5L GTDI 4WD2
1 Without trailer towing package.
2 With trailer towing package.
3 For towing trailers up to 3500 pounds (1588 kilograms), use a
weight-carrying hitch and ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue
loads through your vehicle’s underbody structure. For towing trailers
over 3500 pounds (1588 kilograms), up to the maximum trailer weight,
we recommend you use a weight-distributing hitch to increase front
axle load while towing.
245
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
•Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
•Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
•See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
•Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
•If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 235).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Weight-distributing Hitches
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than
it was before attaching the trailer. Doing
so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
half the way down from H2, toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
•Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
•Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
•Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
246
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)
when loaded.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
•Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
•Do not make full-throttle starts.
•Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
•When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
•Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
247
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
•Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
•If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
•Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
•Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
•Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
•Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above
the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
•Causing internal damage to the
components.
•Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
248
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing a four-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, four-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - 2.3L
ECOBOOST™
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
•Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
•Place the transmission in position N. If
you cannot move the transmission into
N, you may need to override it. See
Transmission (page 180).
•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 129).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
249
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
Four-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground), as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
you cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - 3.5L
DURATEC/3.5L ECOBOOST™
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies or vehicle
transport trailer), it can be flat-towed (all
wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following
conditions:
•Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
•Place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot move the transmission
into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Transmission (page
180).
•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 129).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
You can tow your 3.5L EcoBoost or 3.7L
Duratec (6F50 or 6F55 transmission)
equipped vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
•Tow only in the forward direction.
•Release the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then pressing the keyless
start button until the vehicle starts.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
gearshift into neutral (N).
3. Turn the vehicle off by pressing the
keyless start button once.
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. You need the door
key to lock and unlock doors when the
battery cable is disconnected. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 289).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then turning the ignition key
until the vehicle starts.
250
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
transmission into neutral (N).
3. Turn off your vehicle by turning the
ignition key past the accessory position.
The key position is between the
accessory and off positions. See
Ignition Switch (page 165).
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 289).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
All Vehicles
•Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
•Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each
day and every six hours thereafter. With
the engine running and your foot on the
brake, shift into drive (D) and then into
reverse (R) before shifting back into
neutral (N).
Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your front-wheel
drive vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground by using a tow dolly, or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your four-wheel
drive vehicle with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your four-wheel drive vehicle with
the front wheels off the ground (by using
a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the
ground. This causes damage to your
four-wheel drive system. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the
instruction specified by the equipment
provider.
251
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
•Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
•Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
•Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
•Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
•Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
•Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
•Use the recommended engine oil.
•Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
•Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
•Revving the engine before turning it off.
•Idle for periods longer than one minute.
•Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
•Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
•Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
•Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
•Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
•Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
•Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
•Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
•To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10
miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
252
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
•Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
•Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
•Check that the horn works.
•Check that the exterior lights work.
•Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
253
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
254
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
•24 hours a day, seven days a week.
•For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
•A flat tire change with a good spare, if
provided with the vehicle (except
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation
kit).
•Battery jump start.
•Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
•Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
•Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
•Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
For your convenience, you may complete
the roadside assistance identification card
found in the centerfold of your warranty
guide and retain for future reference.
255
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage. If you
require more information, please refer to
the coverage section of your warranty
guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation
administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered
services in Canada or the continental
United States. Coverage extends to
vehicles that use public, non-seasonal,
annually traveled roadways. Roadside
Assistance coverage does not extend to
vehicles involved in cross-country driving,
logging, autocross and any other form of
off-road use. Well maintained roads and
surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
supplier, and allow their representatives
to perform service as per the standard
operating procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by
road to the nearest authorized dealership,
transportation by rail or water may be
necessary. The program covers a tow to
the dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip.
For rail or water transportation, however,
contact your authorized dealer to confirm
if you are eligible for additional coverage
before you authorize or pay for the service.
Call Ford Roadside Assistance at
1-800-665-2006 for additional
information.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will lose charge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
•Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and
rear direction indicators will flash.
•Press the button again to turn them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel
to the engine. Not every impact will cause
a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
256
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
to switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the
engine by pressing the brake pedal and
the START/STOP button, or switch
on the ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without
pressing the brake pedal. Both ways
re-enable the fuel system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
an authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
257
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
258
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
•You press the hazard control button.
•You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
•Your vehicle runs out of power.
259
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.fordowner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
•U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
•Owner Manuals.
•Maintenance Schedules.
•Recalls.
•Ford Extended Service Plans.
•Ford Genuine Accessories.
•Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
260
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number.
•Your telephone number (home and
business).
•The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Ford in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute
must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
before taking action under the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the
extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
261
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
262
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
263
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
264
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htmWebsite
1–800–333–0510Phone
265
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in
the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and
reconnected, some features will need to
be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 289).
E193713
266
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Powertrain control module power.
20A1
1
Engine emissions (MIL).
20A1
2
A/C clutch control relay coil.
20A1
3
VACC.
Active grill shutters.
Ignition coils.
20A1
4
Not used.—5
Not used.—6
Not used.—7
Not used.—8
Not used.—9
Heated mirrors.
15A1
10
Right hand side electronic cooling fan 3
relay.
—11
Heated rear window.
40A2
12
Not used.—13
Powertrain control module relay.—14
Horn relay power.
20A1
15
A/C clutch relay power.
10A1
16
Rear heated window and heated mirrors
relay.
—17
Rear blower motor relay.—18
Not used.—19
Left hand side cooling fan relay.—20
Cooling fans series/parallel relay.—21
Electronic fan relay 2.
25A2
22
267
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.—23
Not used.—24
Not used.—25
Anti-lock brake system valves.
30A2
26
Trailer tow battery charge relay power.
30A2
27
Not used.—28
Run/start relay.—29
Not used.—30
Electric power-assisted steering.
10A1
31
Anti-lock brake system module.
10A1
32
Powertrain control module (ISPR).
10A1
33
Blind spot information system.
10A1
34
Adaptive cruise control.
Front view camera.
Rear camera.
Not used.—35
Blower motor relay.—36
Trailer tow battery charge relay.—37
A/C compressor clutch relay.—38
Horn relay.—39
Not used.—40
Rear blower motor.
40A2
41
Not used.—42
Front blower motor.
40A2
43
Voltage quality module bus.
50A3
44
Electronic fan relay 1.
40A3
45
268
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Trailer tow brake controller.
30A3
46
Not used.—47
Body control module RP1 bus.
50A3
48
Not used.—49
Body control module RP2 bus.
50A3
50
Electronic fan relay 3.
50A3
51
Anti-lock brake system pump.
60A3
52
Not used.—53
Not used.—54
Not used.—55
Power inverter.
40A2
56
Not used.—57
Not used.—58
Not used.—59
Power point (front console bin).
20A2
60
Not used.—61
Power point (instrument panel).
20A2
62
Fuel pump.
30A2
63
Not used.—64
Power point (2nd row) (without USB
charger).
20A2
65
Not used.—66
Power point (cargo area).
20A2
67
Not used.—68
Power liftgate.
30A2
69
269
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Trailer tow left-hand and right-hand stop
and direction indicator lamps.
20A2
70
Not used.—71
Heated/cooled seats.
30A2
72
Driver seat module.
30A2
73
Driver seat power.
Passenger seat power.
30A2
74
Front wiper motor.
30A2
75
Not used.—76
Not used.—77
3rd row power folding seat module relay.
30A2
78
Starter relay.
30A2
79
Not used.—80
Trailer tow back-up lamp relay.
10A1
81
Not used.—82
Brake on/off switch.
10A1
83
Not used.—84
2nd row USB charger (if equipped).
5A1
85
Not used.—86
Not used.—87
Not used.—88
Not used.—89
Not used.—90
Not used.—91
Multi-contour seat module relay.
15A1
92
270
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Alternator sense.
10A1
93
Rear washer relay.
15A1
94
Rear wiper relay.
15A1
95
Powertrain control module relay coil
power.
10A1
96
Rain sensor.
5A1
97
2nd row seat motors.
20A1
98
Trailer tow parking lamp relay.
20A1
99
1Micro fuse.
2M-type fuse.
3J-type fuse.
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is located under the
instrument panel to the left of the steering
column.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse
panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
271
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
E145984
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Demand lamps.
10A1
1
Battery saver.
Memory seat switch (lumbar power).
7.5A1
2
Driver unlock relay.
20A1
3
Aftermarket electronic brake controller.
5A1
4
Rear heated seat module.
20A1
5
Not used.—6
Not used.—7
Not used.—8
Not used.—9
Securicode™ keyless entry keypad.
5A2
10
Hands free liftgate.
Rear climate control module.
5A2
11
Front climate control module.
7.5A2
12
272
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Instrument cluster.
7.5A2
13
Smart data link.
Steering column control module.
Not used.—14
Smart datalink connector power.
10A2
15
Heads up display.
Not used.—16
Electronic finish panel.
5A2
17
Push button start switch.
5A2
18
Ignition switch.
Key inhibit.
Transmission control switch (tow haul).
7.5A2
19
Not used.—20
Terrain management switch.
5A2
21
Heads up display.
Humidity sensor.
Occupant classification sensor.
5A2
22
Delayed accessory power.
10A1
23
Power windows.
Moonroof.
Folding mirror relay.
DC inverter.
Window/moonroof switch illumination.
Central lock relay.
20A1
24
Left-hand front smart window motor.
30A1
25
Door zone module.
Right-hand front smart window motor.
30A1
26
Door zone module.
Moonroof.
30A1
27
Sony amplifier - 10 channel.
20A1
28
Sony amplifier - 14 channel.
30A1
29
273
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.—30
Not used.—31
SYNC.
10A1
32
GPS module.
Display.
Radio frequency reciever.
Radio.
20A1
33
Run/start relay.
30A1
34
Restrain control module.
5A1
35
Lane departure warning module.
15A1
36
Auto high beam.
EC mirrors.
Rear heated seats.
Heated steering wheel.
20A1
37
Left-hand front window motor.
30A 3
38
Rear power window motors.
1Micro fuse.
2Dual micro fuse.
3Circuit breaker.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
You must replace a failed fuse with
one that has the specified amperage
rating. If you use a fuse with a higher
amperage rating, you may cause severe
wire damage and may start a fire.
E142430
A fuse may fail if electrical components in
the vehicle are not properly working. A
broken wire inside the fuse indicates a
failed fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
274
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we
provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine
service easy. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 486).
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels
275
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E203008
1
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand
side of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
2
E203009
3
3. Move the catch to the left.
276
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
4
E203320
4. Open the hood. Support the hood with
the strut.
Closing the Hood
1. Remove the hood strut from the catch
and secure it correctly after use.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
8–12 in (20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
277
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
A
I H
EB CDFG
E188729
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 282).A
Brake fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 288).B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 281).C
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 281).D
Brake fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 288).E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 289).F
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 266).G
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 299).H
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 288).I
278
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L DURATEC
H EJFG
ABCD
E188731
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 282).A
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 288).B
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 289).C
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 266).D
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 299).E
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 281).F
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 281).G
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 288).H
Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 286).
J
279
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
E173375
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 282).A.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 281).B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 281).C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 288).D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 289).E.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 266).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 299).G.
Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic
Transmission Fluid Check (page 286).
H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 288).I.
280
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.3L
ECOBOOST™
E161560
A B
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.5L
DURATEC/3.5L ECOBOOST™
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil
immediately.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
281
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that
meets Ford specifications. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
334).
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and
use a funnel to pour the engine oil into
the opening.
4. Wipe off any spilled oil.
5. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
Action and descriptionMessage
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 486).
282
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant
and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do
not recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Your warranty may not
cover these damages.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. The use of an improper coolant
may harm engine and cooling system
components and may void the warranty.
Use prediluted engine coolant meeting the
Ford specification.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system
with Motorcraft Premium Cooling
System Flush.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
•Alcohol.
•Methanol.
•Brine.
•Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
will escape as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the Ford specification.
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
283
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend
the use of recycled engine coolant since a
Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed
of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
•A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% decrease
the overheat protection characteristics
of the engine coolant and may cause
engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
•A coolant concentration of 40%
provides improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If you deplete the engine coolant supply,
fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before you incur
incremental component damage. The
fail-safe distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to
the red (hot) area and:
the coolant temperature
warning light will illuminate
the service engine soon indicator
will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle will still
operate. However:
•The engine power will be limited.
•This will disable the air conditioning
system.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start your engine. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
284
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine will
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized
dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.
5. Re-start the engine and drive your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine Fluid Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until
the fluid temperatures reduce.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but because
of the added load, your vehicle’s engine
may temporarily reach higher
temperatures during severe operating
conditions such as ascending a long or
steep grade while pulling a trailer in high
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine
coolant temperature gauge needle move
toward the H and the POWER REDUCED
TO LOWER TEMP message may appear
in the information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power.
In order to manage the engine fluid
temperatures, your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
many factors such as vehicle loading,
towing, grade and ambient temperature.
If this occurs, there is no need to pull off
the road. You can continue to drive your
vehicle while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and
off during severe operating conditions to
protect overheating of the engine. When
the engine coolant temperature decreases
to a normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
285
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the
coolant temperature warning or service
engine soon messages appear in your
information display:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
P.
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the red (hot) area.
After several minutes, if the
temperature does not drop, follow the
remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is normal, restart
your engine and continue.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, and
restart the engine. See Adding Engine
Coolant or How Fail-Safe Cooling
Works in this chapter for more
information.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 2.3L
ECOBOOST™
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked
by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid
should be added by an authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 486). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked
if the transmission is not working properly,
(i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid
leakage.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 3.5L DURATEC/
3.5L ECOBOOST™
WARNING
Do not use supplemental
transmission fluid additives,
treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in
damage to internal transmission
components.
The transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly you should check the fluid level. If
you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact
an authorized dealer.
Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level
WARNING
The dipstick and surrounding
components are hot. Use gloves
when moving components and
checking the transmission fluid level.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.
Only check the transmission fluid level
when the engine is at normal operating
temperature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C).
Normal operating temperature is reached
after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).
286
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E190273
AB
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
Note: Check the fluid level with the engine
running and the transmission in park (P).
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction. See Under Hood Overview
(page 279).
3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the cap and dipstick and remove it
again to check the fluid level.
4. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add
fluid immediately. See Adding
Transmission Fluid.
5. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.
Low Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the minimum
range (below point A) add the correct
specification fluid to be within the hash
mark area. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 344).
Note: If the fluid level is below the
minimum range do not drive your vehicle. A
low fluid level can damage the transmission.
Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark
area (between points A and B) do not add
any fluid.
High Fluid Level
If the fluid level is above the maximum
range (above point B) fluid may need to
be removed. High fluid levels may be
caused by a overheating condition. If you
have operated your vehicle at high speeds,
towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot
weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a
minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking
the level.
Note: An overfill condition can damage the
transmission.
Adding Transmission Fluid
1. Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction.
2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
3. Add fluid that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 344). Pour the
fluid directly into the automatic
transmission fluid cap and dipstick
hole.
4. Replace the cap and dipstick and
remove it again to check the fluid level.
5. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
6. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.
287
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
288
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications.
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Your vehicle has a Motorcraft®
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during
its life of service.
Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover
or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the
battery has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.
When a low voltage battery replacement
is necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow
a technician to connect any electrical
device ground connection directly to the
low voltage battery negative post. A
connection at the low voltage battery
negative post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
289
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: If a person adds electrical or
electronic accessories or components to the
vehicle, the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
performance and durability and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required,
the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
that matches the electrical requirements
of the vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are
maintained by power from the low voltage
battery. Some engine computer settings,
like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,
optimize the driveability and performance
of the engine. Some other computer
settings, like the clock and radio station
presets, are also maintained in memory by
power from the low voltage battery. When
a technician disconnects and connects the
low voltage battery, these settings are
erased. Complete the following procedure
in order to restore the settings:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop,
set the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Fully press the brake pedal and start
the vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 353). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 87).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 353).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, press
the accelerator pedal to start the
engine.
7. While the engine is running, press the
brake pedal and shift into neutral (N).
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km)
to completely relearn the idle and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
290
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace wiper blades annually for
optimum performance.
Front Wiper Blades
Lift the wiper arms away from the
windshield.
E129990
1
1
2
1. Press the locking buttons together.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you switch the ignition on.
Rear Wiper Blade
Lift the wiper arms away from the rear
window.
E183236
1. Remove the wiper blade.
2. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
If your vehicle has been involved in a crash,
have the aim of the headlamp beam
checked by an authorized dealer.
291
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E142592
8 ft (2.4 m)A
Ground to the center of the
headlamp high beam bulb
B
25 ft (7.6 m)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park your vehicle on level ground
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) from a wall
or screen.
2. Measure the distance from the ground
to the center of the headlamp high
beam bulb and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m)
long horizontal reference line on the
wall or screen at this height.
Note: There may be an identifying mark on
the lens to help you locate the center line
of the headlamp high beam bulb. Refer to
the graphic below step 4.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps
and open the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the beam pattern.
If the top edge of the flat zone of high
intensity light is not on the horizontal
reference line, adjust the aim of the
headlamp beam.
292
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E203691
5
5. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver or socket wrench, to turn
the adjuster clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the vertical
aim of the headlamp. The horizontal
edge of the brighter light should touch
the horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
E203692
To gain access to the headlamp securing
bolts and to remove the headlamp
assembly, you must first remove the front
fascia and front bumper assemblies. We
recommend you see an authorized dealer.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch the lamps and the ignition off.
Failure to do so could result in
serious personal injury.
Bulbs become hot when in use. Let
them cool down before you remove
them.
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 297).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
293
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Headlamp
E203696
AB
Headlamp high beam.A
Front direction indicator.B
Front Direction Indicator
E203698
4
2 3
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Headlamp High Beam
E203697
2
3
4
4
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
294
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped)
E203699
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
housing cover.
Note: To remove push pins, use a
flat-bladed screwdriver to pull up the center
release pin.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
E174588
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Rear Direction Indicator and
Reversing Lamp
23
4
E203701
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
screw covers.
3. Remove the retaining bolts from the
lamp assembly.
4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away
from the vehicle.
295
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
B
E203702
5
6
A
5. Release the wire from the securing clip.
6. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
7. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
•Front side marker lamps.
•Front signature lamps.
•Daytime running lamps.
•Headlamp low beam.
•Side direction indicator.
•Rear side marker lamp.
•Brake and rear lamp.
•Central high mounted brake lamp.
License Plate Lamp
E203703
1
3
2
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
296
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDFront side marker lamps.
LEDLEDFront signature lamps.
273757NAKFront direction indicator.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.
LEDLEDHeadlamp low beam.
559005LLHeadlamp high beam.
459145Front fog lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
LEDLEDRear side marker lamp.
LEDLEDBrake and rear lamp.
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.
21WY21WRear direction indicator.
21W21WReversing lamps.
5W5WLicense plate lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
4194Glove compartment lamp.
5W5WInterior lamp.
A6224PFVanity mirror lamp.
5W5WOverhead console lamp.
297
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDRear dome lamp.
LEDLEDLuggage compartment lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
298
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the engine air filter, do not
allow debris or foreign material to enter
the air induction system. Engine
components are susceptible to damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 486).
Incorrect component use can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty. See Motorcraft Parts (page
336).
To replace the air filter element do the
following:
E200522
x2
6
1
2
1. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if it is not properly
seated.
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
299
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
•Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42)
•Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal
Cleaner (ZC-15)
•Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
•Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
•Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
•Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
•Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
•Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
•Motorcraft Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada
only) [CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
•Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B2)
•Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
•Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-56)
•Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover
(U.S. only) (ZC-14)
•Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
•Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
•Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
•Never wash your vehicle when is hot to
the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
•Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
•Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
•Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
•Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
•Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
•Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
300
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure
sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes
and graphics. This can damage them and
cause the edges to peel away from the
vehicle surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
•Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
•Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
•Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
•Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
•Roof racks.
•Bumpers.
•Grained door handles.
•Side moldings.
•Mirror housings.
•Windshield cowl area.
•Do not apply wax to glass areas.
•After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
•Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
301
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
•Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
•Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
•For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
•Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
•If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
•Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
302
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 303).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
•Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
•Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
•Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
303
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
You should:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
•Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
•Household cleaners.
•Alcohol solutions.
•Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS (If Equipped)
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
•Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
•Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
•Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
•To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
304
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
General
•Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
•Protect from sunlight, if possible.
•If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
•Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
•Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
•Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
•Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
•Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
•Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
•Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
•Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
•Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
•With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
•We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
•Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
•Protect against freezing temperatures.
•When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
•Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
•If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
•Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
•Maintain recommended air pressure.
305
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Miscellaneous
•Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
•Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
•Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
•Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
•Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
•Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
•Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
•Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
•Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
•If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
306
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized
Ford dealer to have the system
reprogrammed. If you intend to change the
size of the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 310).
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can
also be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door last post;
next to the driver’s seating position).
Ford strongly recommends maintaining
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination (if equipped).
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or
other crash you must avoid sharp turns and
abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for
the conditions, keep tires inflated to Ford
recommended pressures, never overload
or improperly load your vehicle, and make
sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and
children/infants must use appropriate
restraints to minimize the risk of injury or
ejection.
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
E145298
307
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive
(when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 184). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 275). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive while the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.
For four-wheel drive vehicles, a spare tire
of a different size other than the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar
spare tire size (other than the spare tire
provided) or major dissimilar tire sized
between the front and rear axles could
cause the four-wheel drive system to stop
functioning and default to front-wheel
drive. See Principle of Operation (page
184).
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
308
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145299
•Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
•Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
•Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition. These differences that
make your vehicle so versatile also make
it handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
309
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
310
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or
36 psi (2.5 bar) depending on tires
size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
311
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
CDEFG
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
312
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
Speed ratingLetter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
313
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Speed ratingLetter
rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
314
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
BC
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
315
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
BCDE
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
316
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Recommended Tire Pressures
and Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check the pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation, or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increase
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
build-up and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control, and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear flat.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the
recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
317
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. You
will find a Tire Label containing
the Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door.
The Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure is also found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch on the
B-pillar, or on the edge of the
driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
318
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
319
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which
WARNINGS
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these
labels then you should contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
320
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet
(3.66 meters) away from the
wheel and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
For a mounting pressure more
than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the
person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters)
away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud, or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 35 mph (56 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
321
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive,
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
322
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
Front-wheel drive vehicles
E142547
4-wheel drive vehicles
E142548
Vehicles equipped with directional
tires
E70415
USING SUMMER TIRES
Summer tires provide superior
performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud and
Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on
the tire side wall. Since summer tires do
not have the same traction performance
as All-season or Snow tires, we do not
recommend using summer tires when
temperatures drop to approximately 45°F
(7°C) or below (depending on tire wear
and environmental conditions) or in snow
and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer
tire performance is affected by tire wear
and environmental conditions. If you must
drive in those conditions, we recommend
using Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S),
All-season or Snow tires.
Always store your summer tires indoors at
temperatures above 20ºF (-7ºC). The
rubber compounds used in these tires lose
flexibility and may develop surface cracks
in the tread area at temperatures below
20ºF (-7ºC). If the tires have been
subjected to 20ºF (-7ºC) or less, warm
them in a heated space to at least 40ºF
(5ºC) for at least 24 hours before installing
them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle
with the tires installed, or checking tire
323
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
inflation. Do not place tires near heaters
or heating devices used to warm the room
where the tires are stored. Do not apply
heat or blow heated air directly on the tires.
Always inspect the tires after storage
periods and before use.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, and speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury,
and death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case, or power transfer unit failure. It is also
strongly advised to follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), or Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
The tires on your vehicle (excluding the
265/45ZR20 Sport Tire) may have
all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates
you may need to use snow chains.
Your vehicle may not be compatible with
snow chain or cable usage with the
factory-fitted wheels and tires. Only
certain chains or snow cables have been
approved by Ford as safe for use on your
vehicle with the following wheel and tire
combination(s): 18”x8”x44mm Wheel and
P245/60 R18 Tire. You should only install
chains or cables that have been rated as
10 mm or less in dimension as measured
on the sidewall of your tire. Not all S-class
snow chains meet these restrictions.
Chains of this size restriction will include a
tensioning device. The chains should be
mounted in pairs on the front tires only. If
you need to use chains, it is recommended
that steel wheels (of the same size and
specification) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices
•If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
•Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
•When driving with tire cables do not
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
vehicle damage.
•Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on
dry roads.
•If a temporary spare wheel is mounted
on your vehicle, do not use snow chains
on the axle with the temporary spare
tire.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
324
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically
(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure
to properly maintain your tire pressure
could increase the risk of tire failure, loss
of control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
325
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
326
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
327
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure value
may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one
or more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive
the vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the
tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 325). If the tire
pressure monitor sensor becomes
damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 325). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
328
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
•Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
•Tow a trailer.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
•Use commercial car washing
equipment.
•Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
•Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
•Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
•Use commercial car washing
equipment.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
•Towing a trailer.
•Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
•Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent your vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P) or neutral (N), set the parking brake,
and block (in both directions) the wheel
that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of your vehicle) to the tire being
changed.
329
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
To reduce the risk of possible serious
injury or death, do not remove the full
size spare tire from the factory
secured location. This location is necessary
to achieve police-rated 75 mph rear impact
crash-test performance. Removal
increases the risk of fuel leak in high-speed
rear impacts.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E142551
3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
E194295
4. Turn the two knobs on the floor filler
counterclockwise, then remove the
floor filler and carpeted floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle.
E206671
5. Remove the wing nut securing the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Remove the spare tire from the spare
tire well.
330
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
7. Remove the wing nut bolt that secures
the jack kit by turning it
counterclockwise.
8. Remove the jack kit, which includes the
jack, lug wrench, L-shaped bolt and
tow recovery hook.
9. Turn the lead screw (where the lug
wrench attaches) of the jack by hand
to release the lug wrench from the jack.
Press the button on the wrench to
extend the handle. Fold down the
wrench socket.
10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
E145908
11. The vehicle jacking points are shown
here, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
12. Small arrow-shaped marks on the
sills show the location of the jacking
points.
E201156
13. Raise the wheel by turning the jack
handle clockwise.
14. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
15. Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, marking sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
16. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
34
5
E75442
17. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
332).
Stowing the flat tire
1. Stand the flat tire vertically in the
mini-spare tub with the tire's valve
stem facing rearward toward the
luggage compartment.
331
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E194296
2. Fasten the flat tire to the luggage
compartment back panel by inserting
the L-shaped bolt through one of the
lug bolt holes in the wheel.
3. Turn the L-shaped bolt clockwise into
the threaded hole in the luggage
compartment back panel until the tire
is secured.
4. Unblock the diagonally opposite wheel.
Stowing the jack
E194297
With the road wheel in the vertical position
in the spare tire tub, the jack assembly will
not fit in its standard position. Secure the
jack in the alternate position by inserting
the wing bolt through the jack as shown.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Ib-ft (Nm)*
Bolt size
100 (135)1/2-20 x 1.5
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
332
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
333
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
2.3L EcoBoostEngine
138Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-3-4-2Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.027 - 0.031 in (0.70 - 0.80 mm)Spark plug gap
9.5:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
2.3L EcoBoost Engine
E161383
A
B
Long drivebelt is on first pulley
groove closest to engine.
A.
Short drivebelt is on second
pulley groove farthest from
engine.
B.
334
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
3.5L V6Engine
214Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.049 - 0.053 in (1.25 mm - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
10.8:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
3.5L Engine
E191904
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
3.5L EcoBoostEngine
214Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.033 - 0.037 in (0.75 mm - 0.85 mm)Spark plug gap
10.0:1Compression ratio
335
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing 3.5L EcoBoost Engine
E191904
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-910-SOil filter
BXT-59Battery
BXT-65-650*
SP-537Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2600 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2206 (passenger side)
WW-1106Rear window wiper blade
*This Motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 486).
336
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L DURATEC
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-59Battery
BXT-65-650*
SP-520Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2600 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2206 (passenger side)
WW-1106Rear window wiper blade
*This Motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 486).
337
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-59Battery
BXT-65-650*
SP-534Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2600 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2206 (passenger side)
WW-1106Rear window wiper blade
*This Motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 486).
338
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
339
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35
CSix-speed automatic transmission 6F55
JSix-speed automatic transmission 6F50
340
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil
11.6 qt (11 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid
9.0 qt (8.5 L) *
Automatic transmission fluid
23.7 fl oz (700 ml)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank
2.81 lb (1.276 kg)A/C refrigerant
7.3 fl oz (215 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
341
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.
and Mexico)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
(Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
342
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
343
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
344
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
13.1 qt (12.4 L)Engine coolant (Without Trailer Tow)
13.4 qt (12.7 L)Engine coolant (With Trailer Tow)
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15)Rear axle fluid
10.9 qt (10.3 L)*Automatic transmission fluid (6F50)
11.6 qt (11 L)*Automatic transmission fluid (6F55)
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank
2.56 lb (1.16 kg)A/C refrigerant (Front Wheel Drive)
2.38 lb (1.08 kg)A/C refrigerant (All Wheel Drive)
6.6 fl oz (195 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Front Wheel
Drive)
7.3 fl oz (215 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil (All Wheel
Drive)
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
345
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C945-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.
and Mexico)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
(Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
346
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
347
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
348
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
13.1 qt (12.4 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15)Rear axle fluid
10.9 qt (10.3 L) *
Automatic transmission fluid (6F50)
11.6 qt (11 L) *
Automatic transmission fluid (6F55)
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank
2.8 lb (1.28 kg)A/C refrigerant
7.3 fl oz (215 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
349
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.
and Mexico)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
(Canada)
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
350
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
351
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
352
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
•AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
•FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder
mode.
•MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3
files may be less depending on the
structure of the CD and exact model
of radio present.
353
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
•MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3
file extension) and all folders
containing MP3 files, from F001
(folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is
important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files
are ignored by the system. This enables
you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer, home
computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless
of being in a specific folder). In folder
mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: You can operate your audio system
for up to one hour after you switch off the
ignition. Press the ON/OFF control to
operate the system with the ignition turned
off. The system automatically turns off after
one hour.
354
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
E194335
Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
A
MUTE Press this button to mute the playing audio.B
Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and minutes. You can also set the clock by pressing
the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings.
C
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.D
Number block: In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access.
When tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttons
to enter a phone number.
E
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
F
355
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system
stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
to the next strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press this button
to select the next track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward
through the current track.
G
TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.H
End phone call: Press this button to end a phone call.I
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.J
Cursor arrows Use the arrows to navigate through menus.K
OK:Press OK to select an option.L
CD Slot Insert a CD.M
Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause a track when listening to a CD.N
Answer or Make phone call: Press this button to either pick-up an incoming
phone call or to make a phone call.
O
VOL and Power: Press this button to turn the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
P
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system
stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move
quickly to the previous strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press
this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move
quickly backward through the current track.
Q
PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC® system.
See SYNC™ (page 368).
R
MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
S
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies
bands. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different
radio functions.
T
CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
U
356
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See
Entertainment (page 429).
E194336
357
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn the
control to adjust the volume.
A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
MEDIA and TUNE: Press this button to access or switch between devices you
plug into the USB port. Turn to search the frequency band in individual
increments.
C
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system
stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly
to the next strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press this button
to select the next track. Press and hold the button to move quickly forward
through the current track.
D
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.E
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system
stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move
quickly to the previous strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press
this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move
quickly backward through the current track.
F
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The touchscreen controls most of
the audio features. See Entertainment
(page 429).
358
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
E194337
Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.C
VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
D
- TUNE +: In radio mode, press these buttons to manually search through the
radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, press these buttons to find the next or
previous available satellite radio station.
E
Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press these buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next
channel. If a specific category is selected (such as Jazz, Rock or News), use
these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the selected category. In
CD mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next track.
F
359
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
Radio
Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the
frequency band.
Manual tune
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-
AST and FM-AST frequency bands.
AST
Select to have the system search by certain music
categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
PTY/Set Category
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.
RBDS/RDS
SIRIUS
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN). You will need this number when communicating
with Sirius to activate, modify or track your account.
Show ESN
Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK
to open a list of the following options for this channel:
Tune Channel, Skip Channel or Lock Channel. Once you
skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by pressing
Direct and entering the channel number. Locking or
unlocking a channel requires your PIN.
Channel Guide
Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or
News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions
only stop on channels in that category.
Set Category
Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs, artists or
teams. The system alerts you when the selection is playing
on another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.
Alerts
360
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
SIRIUS
Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.Unlock All Stations
Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.Skip No stations
Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock
channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Parental Lock (PIN)
Audio Settings
Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between
0 and +7.
Spd. Comp. Vol.
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance.
Sound
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.
Occupancy Mode
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.
RBDS/RDS Text
Choose between STEREO SURROUND mode and STEREO
mode.
DSP
CD Settings
Select to scan all disc selections.Scan All
Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan Folder
Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
CD Compression
Clock Settings
Select to set the time.Set Time
Select to set the calendar date.Set Date
Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.
24h Mode
361
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Display Settings
Select to change display brightness.Dimming
Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.
Language
Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
Temp. setting
DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
•Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
•Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
362
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
363
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
* http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
364
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
365
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
366
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
USB PORT (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See Using
SYNC™ With Your Media Player (page
389).
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)
The media hub is located in the center
console or in front of the gear shift.
E194341
USB PortA
SD card slotB
367
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
•Make and receive calls.
•Access and play music from your
portable music player.
•Use 911 Assist and applications, such
as Pandora and Stitcher, via SYNC
AppLink.*
•Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
•Stream music from your connected
phone.
•Text message.
•Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
•Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
368
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
•Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
•Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
369
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 384).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
(cancel | exit)
This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
Help
This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
(main menu | start again)
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
•Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
•Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
•You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
370
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then either of the following:
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
interaction mode novice
Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
interaction mode advanced
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then either of the following:
Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
confirmation prompts off
Clarify your voice command with a short
question.
confirmation prompts on
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
371
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then any of the following:
When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
phone confirmation on
The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
phone confirmation off
Changing the Voice Settings
In addition to using voice commands to
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display.
To change the voice settings press the
Menu button then select:
Menu Item
SYNC-Settings
Voice settings
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Using privacy mode.
•Dialing a number.
•Redialing.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 4000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
372
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the
audio display indicates there is no
paired phone, select the option to add.
3. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing
process.
4. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN provided
by the system in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Using Voice Commands
E142599
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Press the voice and when prompted
say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
Follow the instruc-
tions on the audio
display.
(pair ([Bluetooth]
device | phone |
Bluetooth audio) |
add [a] phone)
You can say any of the voice commands
that appear within open and close brackets
that are separated by |. For example,
where; (what's | what is) appears you say;
what's or what is.
You must say any of the voice commands
that appear outside of open and close
brackets. For example, where; who plays
this (what's | what is) playing, you must
say; who plays this (what's or what is)
playing.
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
373
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth
Devices.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
7. When prompted on your phone's
display, enter the six-digit PIN provided
by the system in the audio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say any of the
following:
Voice Command
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone | Mobile)
Then say any of the following:
call (___)
call ___ at home
call ___ ([at] work | [(in | at) [the]] office)
call ___ on (cell | mobile)
call ___ on other
1
dial [[a] number]
Voice Command
2
([go to] privacy | transfer to phone
| privacy on)
2
(hold call [on] | (put | place) call on
hold)
2
join (call | calls)
2
mute [call] [on]
2
(mute [call] off | Unmute [call])
(turn ringer on | silent mode off)
(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
3
[text] (messages | message)
Help
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".
1 See Dial table below.
2 These commands are only valid while in
a phone call.
3 See the text message table below.
Dial Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
Voice Commands
411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)
700 (seven hundred)
800 (eight hundred)
900 (nine hundred)
Clear (deletes all entered digits)
Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
374
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Commands
Number <0-9>
Plus
Pound (#)
Star (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press any button on the
audio system.
To access text messages say:
Voice Command
[text] (messages | message)
Then say any of the following:
(listen to | read) ([text] message)
forward (text | [text] message)
reply to (text | [text] message)
call [sender]
Phonebook Hints
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name browse phonebook, select a contact
and press:
Menu Item
Hear it
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Voice Command
call
(someone |
[[a] name])
SYNC prompts you to say
the numbers that you wish
to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system
confirms it. You can then
say:
dial [[a]
number]
When the system has stated the
number, you say any of the following:
Voice Command
This initiates the call.(dial | send)
This erases the spoken
digits.
(delete |
correct)
To end the call, press the end call button
on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display.
Receiving Calls
Accepting calls
When receiving a call, you can answer the
call by pressing the accept call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
375
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To use the screen to accept a call
select:
Menu Item
Accept
Rejecting Calls
When receiving a call, you can reject the
call by pressing the reject call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to reject a call select:
Menu Item
Reject
Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, such as
putting a call on hold or joining calls.
To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
from the following options:
Description and actionMenu Item
Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the
microphone on, select the option again.
Mic. off
Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Privacy
Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.
Hold
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).
Dial a number
Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
Join calls
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
376
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and actionMenu Item
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access your call history log.Call History
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.
Description and actionDisplay
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.Dial a number
Access your downloaded phonebook.Phonebook
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.Call History
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
Speed Dial
377
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and actionDisplay
Send, download and delete text messages.Text messaging
Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
BT Devices
View various settings and features on your phone.Phone settings
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
Your phone must support downloading text
messages using Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3.1 mph (5 km/h) or less.
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the audio display
indicates you have a new message.
To hear the message you can say:
Description and
action
Voice command
Select this option
to have the system
read the message
to you.
(listen to | read)
([text] message)
Using the screen you also have the following options:
Description and actionMenu
Item
Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
Ignore
Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
View
If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
More...
378
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and actionMenu
Item
Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Reply to
sender
Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Call sender
Press the OK button to forward the message to
anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
Forward
msg.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select the text messaging option, and
then press the OK button.
Choose from the following options:
Description and actionMenu
Item
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15
messages.
New
Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to
have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select
the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or
forward the message.
View
Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular
phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your
text messages.
Delete
Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all
unread messages from your cellular phone.
More...
Sending a Text Message
Note: You can only send a text message to
one recipient at a time.
1. Select the send option when the
desired selection highlights in the audio
display.
2. Select the confirmation option when
the contact appears.
3. Press the OK button again to confirm
when the system asks if you want to
send the message. A pre-defined
signature appears on each text
message.
Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
and selecting the text option from the audio
display or by replying to a received message
in the inbox.
379
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your
phone settings allow you to access and
adjust features such as your ring tone and
text message notification, modify your
phonebook, and set up automatic
download.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.
Scroll to select from the following options:
Description and actionMenu Item
If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.
Set as master
See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Phone status
Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
Set ringtone
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to
switch the audible tone off or on.
Text msg notify
Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.
Phonebook pref.
380
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phonebook preferencesMenu Item
Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Add contacts
When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.
Delete
Press the OK button to select and download your phone-
book to the system.
Download now
When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
Auto-download
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phone-
dependent and quantity-dependent.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
and then press the OK button.
Select from the following options:
Phonebook preferencesMenu Item
Pair additional phones to the system.Add
1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your phone's display, enter the six-
digit PIN provided by the system in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
381
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phonebook preferencesMenu Item
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. Depending on the functionality of your phone, the
system may prompt you with questions (such as if you
want to download your phonebook). Select either yes or
no to confirm your responses.
Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.
Delete
The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.
Master
Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-
tionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.
Conn.
Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
Discon.
System Settings
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and
then press the OK button.
382
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Scroll to select from the following options:
Description and actionDisplay
Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's
Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.
Bluetooth on
Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Set defaults
Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.
Master reset
Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.
Install on SYNC
Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.
System info
The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 370).
Voice settings
Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.
Browse USB
383
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)
In order for the following features to work,
your cellular phone must be compatible
with SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
•911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
•SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications such as
Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is
compatible).
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
911 Assist
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 40). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 255).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
384
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Setting 911 Assist On or Off
Press the phone button to enter the
phone menu then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Press OK to confirm and enter
the 911 Assist menu.
911 Assist
Scroll to activate this option
then press OK when the
desired option appears in the
radio display.
If you choose not to activate this
feature you will have the following
options:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Provides a display and voice
reminder at phone connection
at vehicle start.
Voice
Reminder
ON
Provides a display reminder
only without a voice reminder
at phone connection.
Voice
Reminder
OFF
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
•You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
385
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.
Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps
will vary by region.
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
Note: AppLink is not available if your
vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
system.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the
menu on-screen. Then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
SYNC-Apps
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
select a particular app or
select:
Mobile
Apps
Find New Apps
Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
Accessing an App's Menu
When an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
wheel control to access the app menu.
You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.
386
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
mobile (apps |
applications)
Use this command to discover the available voice commands.Help
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SYNC prompts you to say the name of an
app to start it on SYNC.
mobile (apps | applications)
SYNC lists all of the currently available
mobile apps.
list [mobile] (apps | applications)
Searches your connected mobile device for
SYNC-compatible mobile apps.
find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications)
help
You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.
App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
•To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
•To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
387
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
•To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
•To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
You can also select a specific app.
If the app supports push notifications, this
setting is listed. Select to enable or disable
the feature as required.
All Apps
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
App Status
You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.
388
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
There are three possible statuses:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system has detected a new app
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Update Needed
No update is required.Up-To-Date
The system is trying to receive an update.Updating...
Update settings
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select this option from the settings menu
to manually preform a needed update.
Request Update
Select this option from the settings menu
to disable automatic updates.
Disable Updates
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile
Apps on SYNC.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 15,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod, Zune,
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats,
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Confirm that the USB device has been
formatted correctly and has the following
specifications:
•USB 2.0.
•File format must be FAT16/32.
The format of the audio files on the USB
device must be:
•MP3.
•Non DRM protected WMA.
•WAV.
•AAC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
389
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
You can now play
music by saying any
of the appropriate
voice commands.
See the media
voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod
| MP3 [player])
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do
not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example,
for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3
[player]) appears, you can say USB or USB
stick.
To Connect Using the System Menu
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the AUX button until an
"initializing" message appears in the
display. Depending on how many
media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may
appear in the display. When indexing
is complete, the screen returns to the
playback menu.
To view USB content select:
Description and ActionMessage
Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the screen returns to the playback menu.
Browse USB
You can browse the files on the USB
device in categories. Choose from the
following:
Message
Play all
Playlists
Songs
Artists
Message
Albums
Genres
Browse USB
Reset USB
Media Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
390
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and ActionVoice Command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3
[player])
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; who plays this (what's | what is) playing, you must say; who plays
this (what's or what is) playing.
Description and ActionCommand
Pauses device playback.pause
Resumes device playback.play
play [album] ___
Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play all
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
Plays the next track on the current media.next [track | title | song | file | podcast |
chapter | episode]
Plays the previous track on current media.previous [track | title | song | file |
podcast | chapter | episode]
Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the
one currently playing.
[play] (similar music | more like this)
play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
Repeats the current track.repeat one [on]
391
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and ActionCommand
Plays the current playlist in a random order.
(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle [all] [on]
shuffle off
At any time during playback, you can press
the voice button and ask the system what is
playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(if populated) of the current track.
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
Examples of USB Commands
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
ways to find and play a song using voice.
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
•Play song "Penny Lane".
•Play "Penny Lane".
If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:
•Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
•Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth.
To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the
MEDIA button (next to the audio display)
or Source button, or press the voice button
and when prompted say:
Voice Command
Bluetooth audio
Then any of the following:
Voice Command
pause
play
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
392
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
reset the index of your USB devices.
Press AUX to select USB playback.
Description and ActionMessage
This will enter the media menu.Options
Then any of the following:
Description and ActionMessage
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Shuffle
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track
You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
Similar music
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset SYNC USB
Accessing Your USB Song Library
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the
audio display) to select USB playback.
Description and ActionMessage
This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
Browse USB
If there are no media files to access, the
display indicates there is no media.
393
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
If there are media files, you have the following options:
Description and ActionDisplay
Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
in numerical order.*
Play all
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
or MTP).*
Playlists
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Search for and play a specific indexed track.*
Songs
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.*
Artists
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Sort all indexed media files by album.*
Albums
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.*
Genres
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
Browse USB
1. Press the OK button to select.
394
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and ActionDisplay
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and
then press the OK button.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset USB
*You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
Using Voice Commands
You can access and view your USB songs
using voice commands.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
Accessing and Viewing USB Media
(browse | search | show) all (album |
albums)
(browse | search | show) all (artist |
artists)
(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres)
(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists)
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
(browse | search | show) album ___
(browse | search | show) artist ___
(browse | search | show) genre ___
(browse | search | show) playlist ___
USB 2 (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.
You can plug in an additional USB device
into the second USB port.
Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings
You can access these menus using the
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 372).
Voice Commands for Audio
Sources
Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command.
395
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice Command
(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Below are a few examples of voice
commands you can use.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)
(disc | CD [player]) play
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM 2
((line | AV | audio video) in | AUX | audio
video)
Radio
*
[tune [to]] SAT
*
Sirius
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
Voice Command
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
Help
* If equipped.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button, and then
say any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
tone, say:
Voice Command
Radio
You can then say any of the following
commands.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
[tune [to]] AM preset ___
[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___
396
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command
[tune [to]] FM 2
[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])
[tune [to]] FM preset ___
FM ___ HD ___
[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
HD ___
[tune [to]] preset ___
Tune
help
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
(If equipped)
E142599
To listen to Sirius satellite radio,
press the voice button and, after
the tone, say:
Voice Commands
Sirius
When you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, you can press the voice
button, and say any of the commands
in the following table.
Voice Commands
[tune [to]] SAT
[tune [to]] SAT 1
[tune [to]] SAT 2
[tune [to]] SAT 3
[tune [to]] preset ___
[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___
[tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___
Voice Commands
[tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___
tune [to] [Sirius]
Help
You can say the
channel number (0-
233) to listen to that
Sirius station.
[tune [to]] Sirius
[channel] ___
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button, and then say
any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:
Voice Command
(disc | CD [player]) play
You can then say any of the following
commands.
pause
play
[play] next track
[play] previous track
[play | change to] track [number] ___
*
repeat (track | song) [on]
repeat folder [on]
repeat off
*
(shuffle | random | mix) [on |
(tracks | songs) [on]]
397
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command
(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |
disc) [on]
(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]
shuffle off
*You need to indicate to the system which
track or folder to repeat or shuffle when
using these commands.
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction. Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.
398
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
399
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC. Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
400
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device. The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying. After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
401
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it. Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
402
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
AppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
403
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
404
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
availble Bluetooth ports, you
will not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile apps
menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
405
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
AB
GC
DF E
E161891
MessageItem
PhoneA
NavigationB
ClimateC
SettingsD
MessageItem
HomeE
InformationF
EntertainmentG
406
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cell
phone, entertainment, information and
system settings. The corners display active
modes within the menus, for example; your
cell phone's status.
Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving.
Note: You can access the entertainment
features for 30 minutes after you switch the
ignition off, and no doors are opened.
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Phone
Quick Dial
Phonebook
History
Messaging
Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
Message
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Intersection
Message
City Center
Map
Edit Route
Cancel Route
CLIMATE
Press the corresponding icons to control
the following options:
•Driver Settings
•Recirculated Air
•Auto
•Dual
•Passenger Settings
•A/C
•Defrost
SETTINGS
E142607
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Clock
Display
Sound
Vehicle
Settings
Help
HOME
E142613
Press to access the home
screen.
407
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Note: Depending on your vehicle’s option
package and software, the screens may vary
in appearance from the descriptions in this
section. The features may also be limited
depending on the market. Check with an
authorized dealer for availability.
INFORMATION
E142608
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Services
Travel Link
Alerts
Message
Calendar
Apps
Where Am I?
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
Message
AM
FM
SIRIUS
CD
USB
BT Stereo
SD Card
Using the Audio Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Action and DescriptionControls
Switch the media features on or off.Power
Adjust the volume of playing media.Volume
Use as you normally would in media modes.Tune
Eject a CD from the entertainment system.Eject
Press this button to switch the display screen off. Press again,
or touch the screen to switch the display screen on.
Display
Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media
modes.
Source
Adjust the settings for:Sound
Bass
Treble
408
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionControls
Midrange
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
EQ Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Action and DescriptionControl
Adjust the volume of playing media.VOL
Press to start a voice session. Press again to interrupt a voice
prompt and begin speaking. Press and hold to end an active
voice session.
Voice
Use as you normally would in media and phone modes.Seek and Call Accept
Use as you normally would in media and phone modes.Seek and Call Reject
Using the Touchscreen
•Make sure your hands are clean and
dry.
•Press firmly on the center of a control
graphic or menu item.
•Keep metal objects or other conductive
material away from the surface of the
touchscreen.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small
amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour
or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not
use detergent or any type of solvent to
clean the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available:
•Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm
EST.
•United States: 1-888-270-1055
•Canada: 1-800-565-3673
Note: Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
409
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
•Do not operate media devices if the
power cables are broken or damaged.
•Make sure the power cables do not
interfere with the safe operation of your
vehicle's controls or affect your safe
driving abilities.
•Some SYNC functions are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited
to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system are restricted
from use unless your vehicle is stationary.
•Screens crowded with information, for
example:
•Point of Interest reviews and ratings
•SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores
•Movie times
•Ski conditions.
•Any action that requires keyboard use,
for example: entering a navigation
destination or editing information.
•All lists are limited, for example: phone
contacts.
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Speed-restricted Features
Pairing a cell phoneCell phone
Adding or editing phonebook contacts
Phone contacts and recent phone call entries
Enabling Valet ModeSystem Functionality
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active
Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless
Editing the list of wireless networks
410
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Speed-restricted Features
Adding or editing wallpaperPhotos and Graphics
Composing text messagesText Messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book or Avoid Area entries
Privacy Information
When you connect a cell phone to SYNC,
the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cell phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may
contain data about your cell phone book,
text messages (read and unread), and call
history, including history of calls when your
cell phone was not connected to the
system. In addition, if you connect a media
device, the system creates and retains an
index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development
log of approximately 10 minutes of all
recent system activity. The log profile and
other system data may be used to improve
the system and help diagnose any
problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log remain in your
vehicle unless you delete them, and are
generally accessible only in your vehicle
when your cell phone or media player is
connected. If you no longer plan to use the
system or your vehicle, we recommend you
carry out a Master Reset to erase all stored
information.
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada do not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described without consent,
a court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911
Assist®, Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.
411
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Right Vehicle Information
Display
E203474
412
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E185883
The display is located on the right side of
your instrument cluster (A). You can use
your steering wheel controls to view and
make minor adjustments to active modes
without taking your hands off the wheel.
For example:
•In Entertainment mode, you can view
what is now playing, change the audio
source, select memory presets and
make some adjustments.
•In Phone mode, you can accept or
reject an incoming call.
•If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, you can view the current
route or activate a route.
E144811
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes.
413
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
•Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
•Press the right arrow to enter the mode.
•Press the left or right arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
•Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, Compass appears in the display
instead of Navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the Compass menu, you
can see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle
is traveling, not true direction (for example,
if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle
of the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using Voice Commands
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the lower left status
bar indicating the status of the voice
command session (such as Listening,
Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).
How to Use Voice Commands
E142599
The following are some of the
voice commands that you can
say at any time during a voice
command session.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Main Menu
What Can I Say
Previous Page
Go Back
Help
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken voice commands.
•After pressing the voice command icon,
wait until after the tone sounds and a
message appears before saying a voice
command. Any voice command spoken
prior to this does not register with the
system.
•Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
•At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice command icon.
Accessing a List of Available Voice
Commands
To access a list of available voice
commands you can do either of the
following.
414
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Using the touchscreen, press:
Menu Item
Settings
Help
Voice Command List
Using the steering wheel control, press
the voice button and when prompted
say one of the following:
Voice Commands
List of Commands
Radio List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Voice Instructions List of Commands
Voice Command Settings
These allow you to customize the level of
system interaction, help and feedback. The
system defaults to standard interaction
that uses candidate lists and confirmation
prompts as these provide the highest level
of guidance and feedback.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
In this mode the system provides
detailed interaction and guidance.
NoviceInteraction Mode
This mode has less audible interac-
tion and more tone prompts.
Advanced
The system uses these short questions to confirm your voice
command. If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess
as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally
ask you to confirm a voice command.
Confirmation Prompts
Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voice
commands. The system creates these lists when it has the
same confidence level of several options based on your voice
command
Phone Candidate Lists
Media Candidate Lists
415
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Using the touchscreen, press the
settings icon, then press:
Menu Item
Voice Settings
Voice Control
Select from the following:
Interaction Mode
Confirmation Prompts
Media Candidate Lists
Phone Candidate Lists
Voice Control Volume
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
The voice command system has a dual
mode feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and
making on-screen selections. This is
available only when the system displays a
list of candidates generated during a voice
command session. For example, this can
be used when entering a street address or
trying to call a contact from a cell phone
paired to the system.
SETTINGS
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
416
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
MessageItem
ClockA
DisplayB
SoundC
VehicleD
SettingsE
HelpF
Clock
Under this menu, you can set the clock,
access and adjust the display, sound and
vehicle settings as well as access settings
for specific modes or the help feature.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Press the + or - to adjust the time.Clock
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments such
as 12-hour or 24-hour mode, activate GPS time synchroniza-
tion and have the system automatically update new time
zones.
You can also switch the outside air temperature display off
and on. It appears at the top center of the touchscreen, next
to the time and date.
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to
update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it may take a few minutes for the
update to display the correct time.
Display
You can adjust the display using the
touchscreen or the voice button on the
steering wheel controls.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Display
Then select from the following:
417
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When set to On, lets you use the automatic dimming feature.Auto Dim
When set to Off you are able to adjust the brightness of the screen.
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
Allows you to switch the display off. It also allows you to set the screen
to a certain brightness or have the system automatically change based
on the outside light level.
Mode
If you also select:
These features will allow you to adjust the dimming of
your screen.
Auto
Night
Allows you to adjust screen dimming as the outside lighting conditions
change from day to night.
Auto Dim
Manual Offset
Allows you to display the default photo or upload your own.Edit Wallpaper
E142599
To make adjustments using the voice
button, press the button and when
prompted, say:
Voice command
Display Settings
Uploading Photos for Your Home
Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
either from your USB mass storage device
or from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
be compatible and appear as a blank
(black) image on the display.
The system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.
To access, press:
To upload your photos, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Display
Follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.Edit Wallpaper
418
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Only the photograph(s), which meets the
following conditions display:
•Compatible file formats are as follows:
JPG, GIF, PNG, BMP.
•Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
•Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.
Sound
To make adjustments using the
touchscreen, select:
Message
Settings
Sound
Then select from the following:
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
DSP
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
these sound settings.
Vehicle
To make adjustments using the
touchscreen, select:
Message
Settings
Vehicle
Then select from the following:
Ambient Lighting
*
Vehicle Health Report
Camera Settings
Enable Valet Mode
* US only
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When you switch this feature on, ambient
lighting illuminates the dashboard,
footwells, doors, cupholders, and console
with a choice of colors.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Ambient Lighting
•You can then touch the desired color.
•Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity.
•To switch the feature on or off, press the power button.
419
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, US Only)
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Vehicle Health
Turn on and off and set the mileage interval at which you
would like to receive the reports. Press the ? for more
information on these selections.
Automatic Reminders
Mileage Interval (Miles)
To run the vehicle health report immediately.Run Vehicle Health
Report Now
You can find more information on Vehicle Health Report in this chapter.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Enhanced Park Aids
Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear view camera system in another chapter. See
Parking Aids (page 198).
Enable Valet Mode
Note: If the system locks, and you need to
reset the PIN, please contact the Customer
Relationship Center.
United States: 1-800-392-3673
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
420
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Then enter a four digit PIN twice, as prompted.Enable Valet Mode
After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the
PIN again.
Continue
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
System
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
System
Then select from the following:
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or
French.
Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made
through the touchscreen.
Touch Screen Button
Beep
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC
format.
Keyboard Layout
Install any downloaded applications or view the current
software licenses.
Install Applications
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal
settings and personal data.
Master reset
421
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Voice Control
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Settings
Voice Control
Then select from the following:
Novice interaction mode provides more detailed interaction
and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible interaction
and more tone prompts.
Interaction Mode
Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly
heard or understood your request.
Confirmation Prompts
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system
may occasionally ask you to confirm settings.
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.
Media Candidate Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.
Phone Candidate Lists
This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.Voice Control Volume
Media Player
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Media Player
Then select from the following:
When this feature is on, the system automatically switches
to the media source upon initial connection. This allows you
to listen to music during the indexing process. When this
feature is off, the system does not automatically switch to
the inserted media source.
Autoplay
422
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You
can also set a device as your favorite so that the system
automatically attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
Bluetooth Devices
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Database.
Gracenote® Database
Info
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
metadata information for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Gracenote® Manage-
ment
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplied cover
art for your music files. This overrides any art from your device.
This feature defaults to Media Player.
Cover Art Priority
Navigation
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Navigation
Then select from the following:
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or
bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.
Select shortest route, fastest route or ecological route as
your preferred route. This route will be displayed first.
Route Preferences
Always use preferred route. If set to yes, the system will only
calculate a single route. This speeds up your destination entry
process.
Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculated ecolo-
gical route. This may incur a time penalty.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid toll roads.
423
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.
Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences
Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province
information.
Have the system automatically avoid traffic concerns or allow
you to accept or decline an alternative route.
Traffic Preferences
Have the system automatically alert you to traffic concerns
that occur on your route.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Have the system display areas where road work occurs.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving condi-
tions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the
road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be reduced visib-
ility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announcements.
Enter specific areas that would like to avoid on planned
navigation routes.
Avoid Areas
424
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Phone
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Phone
Then select from the following:
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
Turn Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside
your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text message noti-
fications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your
vehicle.
Do Not Disturb
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information
(page 453).
911 Assist
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,
beep, text to speech or silent.
Phone Ringer
Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone,
beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Text Message Notifica-
tion
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet
data connection. Select to make your connection profile with
the personal area network or to turn off your connection. You
can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system
always connect, never connect when roaming, or query on
connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone
as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning
425
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Wireless and Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that
creates a wireless network within your
vehicle, thereby allowing other devices
(such as personal computers or phones)
in your vehicle to speak to each other,
share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fi
feature, everyone in your vehicle can also
access the internet if you have a USB
mobile broadband connection inside your
vehicle, your phone supports personal area
networking or if you park outside a wireless
hotspot.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Wireless & Internet
Then select from the following:
Wi-Fi Network (Client) ModeWi-Fi Settings
Turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure
you switch it on for connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network
Allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You
can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority and signal
strength. You can also choose to search for a network,
connect to a network, disconnect from a network, receive
more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode
Makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when
turned on. This forms the local area network within your
vehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer and
internet browsing. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings
Allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as
the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Devices List
Allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
426
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile
broadband connection to access the internet. (You must
switch on your mobile broadband device on your personal
computer before connecting it to the system.) This screen
allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB
mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile broadband
settings may not display if the device is already on.) You can
select the following:
USB Mobile Broadband
Country
Carrier
Phone Number
User Name
Password
Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you
your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect, set as
favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered
trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Bluetooth Settings
Choose your connection methods and change them as
needed. You can select to change order and have the system
either always attempt to connect using a USB, mobile
broadband, or using Wi-Fi.
Prioritize Connection
Methods
E142626
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification
mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
427
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Help
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Help
Then select from the following:
Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Inform-
ation Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Sirius satellite radio ESN
Gracenote® Database Information and Library version
View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your
system.
Software
Licenses
Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving.Driving Restric-
tions
Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information (page
453).
911 Assist
Allows you to save up to two
numbers as ICE contacts for
quick access if there is an
emergency.
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial
The ICE contacts you select
appear at the end of the
Emergency Assistance call
process.
Select to access your phone-
book and then select the
desired contacts. The
numbers then appear as
options on this screen for the
ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons.
Edit
View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice
Command List
428
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E142599
You can also access Help using
the voice commands. The
system provides allowable voice
commands for the current mode.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Help
You can say help at any time to get
assistance with commands, menus or
other information.
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
E161892
Message and DescriptionMessage
AMA
FMB
SIRIUSC
CDD
USBE
Touch this button to scroll down for more options, for example
SD Card and USB
F
429
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Message and DescriptionMessage
These buttons change with the media mode you are in.G
Radio memory presets.H
Note: Some features may not be available in your area. Contact an authorized dealer for
more information.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
AM/FM Radio
E142611
The following controls are
available for AM/FM radio
Action and DescriptionItem
Touch either tab to listen to the radio. To change between AM and FM
presets, just touch the AM or FM tab.
AM
FM
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when finished.
Presets
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The light on the button illumin-
ates when the feature is on. HD Radio allows you to receive radio
broadcasts digitally, where available, providing free, crystal-clear sound.
See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
HD Radio
Touch this button to make adjustments to your audio settings.Options
Touch this button to go to the next strong AM or FM radio station. The
light on the button illuminates when the feature is on.
Scan
Touch this button to manually enter the desired station number. Touch
Enter when you are done.
Direct Tune
Options
You can make adjustments to the following options:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to adjust settings for:Sound Settings
Bass
Midrange
Treble
430
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
This allows you to select a category of music you would like to search
for. You can then choose to either seek or scan for the stations playing
that category.
Set PTY for
Seek / Scan
This allows you to view the information broadcast by FM stations.RDS Text
Display
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the system automatically store
the six strongest stations in your current location.
AST
This feature is available when HD Radio is on, and allows you to tag a
song to download later. When you select On, TAG appears on-screen
when HD Radio is active. You can touch TAG to save the information
of the song that is playing. When you plug in your portable music player,
the information transfers, if supported by your device. When you are
connected to iTunes, the tags appear to remind you of the songs you
would like to download. See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
TAG Button
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
431
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
The HD logo either blinks when acquiring
a digital station, and then stays solid when
digital audio is playing, or is grey when
acquiring a digital station, and then
changes to orange when digital audio is
playing. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
TAG allows you to save a song to
download later when you are on an
acquired HD Radio station and the feature
is on.
To turn the feature on and use it, select AM or FM and the select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Options
TAG Button
When you hear a song you want to tag, select:On
The system automatically saves the song's information and transfers
it to your portable music player (if supported) when you connect it to
the system. The system automatically transfers the tag to your player
(if already connected) and a pop-up confirms the transfer.
TAG
When you access iTunes with your portable music player, the tags
appear to you as a reminder. The system allows you to tag up to
approximately 100 songs. For a list of devices that support tagging,
see www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.sync-
maroute.ca
432
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This feature
still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does not scan
for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
Scan
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and
hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute
while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before
the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Presets
Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle
is outside the station’s reception area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of
the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog
broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you
are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the
station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital
signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast
stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver
verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift
from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station
blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
433
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form
at http://www.ibiquity.com/
automotive/
report_radio_station_experi-
ences
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form
at http://www.ibiquity.com/
automotive/
report_radio_station_experi-
ences
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
This selection disables HD2-
HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not
found when you press
Scan
434
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
Radio
Then you can say a command similar to the following:
Say a frequency or preset.FM
Off
Help
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
E142611
To turn the feature on press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SIRIUS
You can then select any of the following:
Save a channel by pressing and holding one of the memory preset
areas. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the channel.
Sound returns when finished.
Presets
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite.Alerts
If you are listening to music, you can save the song or artist, so the
system can alert you when they are playing on a satellite radio
channel. If you are listening to a sporting event, you can save your
favorite teams so the system can alert you when they are playing
on a satellite radio channel. You can also edit alerts or turn alerts
on or off.
435
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When an alert appears on the screen, you can choose to tune to
the channel, cancel the alert or turn off alerts.
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately
45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the
current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
Replay
While in replay mode:
Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next
song.
Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the
current track.
Press play or pause to play or pause the audio.
Press the button again to return to live audio.
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels.Scan
Touch this button to view a list of all available stations. Scroll to
see more categories. Touch the station you want to listen to.
Browse
Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company shall
not be responsible for Alert feature variation.
Browsing Controls
Action and DescriptionMessage
Touch this button if you want to skip this channel.Skip
Touch this button if you do not want anyone to listen to this
channel.
Lock
Touch this button to see song titles playing on other stations.Title
Touch this button to see artists playing on other stations.Artist
Touch this button to see a list of all the channel names.Channel
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust
various media settings.
436
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
MessageMessage
Touch this button to adjust settings for:Sound Settings
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
This allows you to select a category of music you would like to
search for. You can then choose to either seek or scan for the
stations playing that category.
Set Category for
Seek/Scan
This allows you to lock and unlock channels, change or reset your
PIN or unlock all channels. To use this feature, you need your initial
PIN, which is 1234.
Parental Lockout
This feature allows you turn alerts on and off.Artist / Title / Team
Alerts
SIRIUS requires this number when communicating with you about
your account.
Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
Touch this button to manually enter the desired satellite channel
number. Touch Enter when you are done
Direct Tune
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
437
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and
other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. The ESN
is on the System Information Screen (SR
ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX).
To access your ESN, touch the bottom
left corner of the touchscreen, then
select:
Message
SIRIUS
Options
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow
and ice build-up and keep luggage and other materials as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstruc-
tions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses,
parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere
with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a
stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system
may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference
and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio
signal interfer-
ence
438
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-
7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-
7474 to resolve subscription
issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the chan-
nels available for your vehicle.
Subscription Updated
439
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice
Commands
E142599
If you are listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. You will hear a prompt, you can
then say any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice button
and, after the tones press the voice
button and when prompted say:
Voice command
Sirius
You can then say any of the following
or a similar command:
SAT 1
Voice command
Sports Games
Tune
Help
You can also say the name of any Sirius
station, such as “The Highway” or “Deep
Tracks”, to listen to that station.
CD
E142611
To access, press the lower left corner
on the touchscreen, then select:
Menu Item
CD
Insert your CD then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to repeat the currently
playing track, all tracks on the disc or switch
the feature off if already on.
Repeat
Touch this button to play the tracks or
entire albums in random order, or switch
the feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling
of all available tracks.
Scan
Touch this button to see disc information.More Info
Touch this button to look through all avail-
able CD tracks.
Browse
440
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
To adjust the Sound Settings, select:
Menu Item
Options
Sound Settings
Then any of the following:
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
Occupancy Mode
EQ Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands.
If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:
Voice command
CD Player
When listening to a CD you can say
many commands. Following are a few
examples of what you can say.
Voice command
Play
Pause
Next Track
Previous Track
Help
*This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.
SD Card Slot and USB Port
The SD card slot and USB port are located
in the Media Hub. See Media Hub (page
367).
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.
To remove the SD card, press the card in
and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to
pull the card to remove it as this could cause
damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 466).
441
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E196637
To access and play music from your device,
press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen.
E142620
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
USB Port
E196638
To access and play music from your device,
press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen.
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Playing Music from Your Device
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 30,000 songs.
E142611
Insert your device and select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Once the system recognizes your USB or SD card you can then
select from the following options:
USB
SD Card
This feature replays the currently playing song or album.Repeat
Touch this button to play music on the selected album or folder
in random order.
Shuffle
442
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
This feature allows you to choose music similar to what is currently
playing.
Similar Music
Touch this button to see disc information, for example current
track, artist name, album and genre.
More Info
Touch this button to view and adjust various media settings.Options
Sound
You can adjust the settings for:
Action and DescriptionMessage
BassSound Settings
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
EQ Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
Allows you to select more settings, which is under Media Player.
See Settings (page 416).
Media Player
Settings
Displays software and firmware information about the currently
connected media device.
Device Information
Indexes your device when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (for example adding or removing
tracks) to make sure you have the latest voice commands avail-
able for all media on the device.
Update Media Index
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Browse
This feature allows you to view the
contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, for example genre,
artist or album.
If you want to view song information, for
example Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album,
and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
443
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
You can also select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
To hear how the system pronounces the current band and song.
This can be helpful when using voice commands to make sure
the system correctly plays your request.
What’s Playing?
USB and SD Card Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command
SD Card
USB
Then commands such as the following:
Browse
Next Track
Pause
Say the name of what you would like to listen to such as a band, song,
album or playlist.
Play
*
Play Artist ___
*
Play Song ___
Similar Music
Help
* ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group,
artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles" or "Play song Penny
Lane".
444
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. Supported audio formats
include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed
media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are
descriptive software identifiers embedded
in the media files, provide information
about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
Bluetooth Audio
E142611
The system allows you to stream
audio over your vehicle's
speakers from your connected,
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
To access, press the lower left corner
on the touchscreen, then select:
Message
BT Stereo
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
E142599
The voice system allows you to
control your media with a simple
voice command. For example to
change songs, press the voice button and
follow the system prompts.
PHONE
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
445
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
MessageItem
PhoneA
Quick DialB
PhonebookC
HistoryD
MessagingE
SettingsF
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. Once you pair your cell
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While
the system supports a variety of features,
many are dependent on your cell phone’s
functionality.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Using privacy mode.
•Dialing a number.
•Redialing.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone’s
compatibility, see your cell phone’s user
manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use the
phone features of SYNC is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone with SYNC.
This allows you to use your cell phone in a
hands-free manner.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Touch the upper left corner of the touchscreen:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Add phone
Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNC
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone
is in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual if
necessary.
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
446
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that
the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your
cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cell phone is in the correct mode.
See your device's manual if necessary.
To pair a subsequent cell phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Phone
Settings
Bluetooth Devices
Add Device
Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNC
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone
is in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual if
necessary.
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that
the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your
cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
447
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button and say a
command similar to the following:
Voice command
Call
Dial
You can say the name of a person from
your phone book to call or a say a number
to dial. For example "Call John" or "Dial
867-5309".
E142632
To end the call or exit phone
mode, press and hold the phone
button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Message
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
E142632
To reject the call, select:
Message
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on the
touchscreen to select from the following
options:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to access the on-screen numerical pad to
enter a number and place a call. During an active call, you can
also choose any of these options:
Phone
Mute Call
Hold Call
Privacy
Join Calls
End
448
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select to call stored contacts.Quick Dial
Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your
previously downloaded phonebook. The system places the
entries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top of
the screen
Phonebook
To turn on contact picture settings, if your device supports this
feature, select:
Phone
Settings
Manage Phonebook
Display Photos from Phonebook
Certain smartphones may support transferring street addresses
when listed with phonebook contact information. If your cell
phone supports this feature, you can select and use these
addresses as destinations and save them as favorites.
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent feature. If your cell phone
does not support downloading call history using Bluetooth,
SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system.
Call History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC,
you can access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.
You can also choose to save these to:
Quick DialFavorites
Send text messages using the touchscreen. See Text
Messaging later in this section.
Messaging
Touch this button to access various phone settings, for
example turning Bluetooth on and off, managing your phone-
book and more. See Phone Settings later in this section
Settings
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your cell phone.
You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, for
example LOL.
449
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Touch the top left corner of the display,
then select:
Message
Phone
Messaging
Then any of the following:
Listen (speaker icon)
Dial
Message
Send Text
View
Delete
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
To compose and send a text message, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Phone
Messaging
Enter a cell phone number or choose from your phonebook.Send Text
Allows you to customize the pre-defined message or create
a message on your own.
Edit Text
Sends the message as it is.Send
You can then preview the message, verify
the recipient as well as update the
message list.
Text Message Options
Message
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
Message
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there
early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
450
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Message
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
Note: If you select View and your vehicle is
traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system
offers to read the message to you instead
of allowing you to view it while driving.
When a new message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the screen
displays a pop-up with the caller name
and ID, if supported by your cell phone.
You can select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
To view the text message.View
For SYNC to read the
message to you.
Listen
To call the contact.Dial
To exit the screen.Ignore
Phone Settings
To enter the phone settings menu select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Phone
Settings
Then any of the
following:
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
To turn Bluetooth off or on.Bluetooth
If you want all calls to go directly to your voicemail and not
ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message
notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.
Do Not Disturb
Turn the 911 Assist feature on and off. See Information
(page 453).
911 Assist
Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call.
Choose from possible system ring tones, your currently paired
cell phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or a silent
notification.
Phone Ringer
Select a text message notification, if supported by your cell
phone. Choose from possible system alert tones, text-to-
speech or silent.
Text Message Notifica-
tion
451
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
If your cell phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your
internet data connection. Select to make your connection
profile with the personal area network or to turn off your
connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings or
have the system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
To access features such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your cell
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
To have the system alert you when your cell phone is in
roaming mode.
Roaming Warning
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following or a
similar command:
Voice command
Call Voicemail
Listen to Message
Reply to Message
Pair Phone
Help
452
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
INFORMATION
E188418
MessageItem
SYNC ServicesA
Travel LinkB
AlertsC
CalendarD
AppsE
Where Am I?F
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
Information button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, press the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
SYNC Services (If Equipped,
United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
and model year and may require a
subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change
or discontinue this product service at any
time without prior notification or incurring
any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Phone (page 445).
453
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in
roads, traffic conditions or driving
conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services
You can connect to SYNC Services using
voice commands or by selecting a menu
item on the touchscreen.
To use voice commands, press the voice button and say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts
to request the desired service, for example traffic or
directions.
Services
Once connected to SYNC Services, you can also say the following:
Receive a list of available services from which to choose.What Can I Say
To return to the Services main menu.Services
Receive system help.Help
454
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
press the I (Information) button. If your
vehicle is not equipped with Navigation,
press the green tab on your touchscreen.
To use the touchscreen select:
Menu Item
Connect to Services
This command initiates an outgoing call
to SYNC Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone. Once you connect to the service,
follow the voice prompts to request the
desired service.
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
Press the voice button and say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
To receive directions to a location. Once
you select your destination, the system
uploads your current vehicle location,
calculates a route based on current traffic
conditions and sends it back to your vehicle.
After the route download is complete, the
phone call automatically ends. You then
receive audible and visual driving instruc-
tions as you travel toward your destination.
Directions
To find a business or type of business. Once
you select your destination, the system
uploads your current vehicle location,
calculates a route based on current traffic
conditions and sends it back to your vehicle.
After the route download is complete, the
phone call automatically ends. You then
receive audible and visual driving instruc-
tions as you travel toward your destination.
Business Search
To find the closest business or type of
business to your location, within business
search.
Search near me
Provides you with further assistance within
Directions and Business Search. The system
may prompt you to speak with an operator
when it has difficulty matching your voice
request. The live operator can assist you by
searching for businesses by name or by
Operator
455
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street inter-
sections. Operator Assist is a feature of your
SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
if you want the route updated. Say yes
when prompted and the system sends a
new route to your vehicle.
Yes [During an active route]
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
To use the steering wheel controls, press
and hold the hang-up phone button on the
steering wheel.
To use voice commands, press the
voice button and say:
Voice Command
Good-bye
SYNC Services Quick Tips
Tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker
access to your most used or favorite information. You can
save address points, such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams, for example
Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn more about
personalization by logging onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time (while connected to SYNC
Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip (such
as a sports report) and say your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification
Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle
equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
Portable
456
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
SYNC Services Voice Commands
E142599
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, SYNC Services
downloads your requested
destination to the navigation system. The
navigation system then calculates the
route and provides driving instructions.
See Navigation (page 466).
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, when a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation systems),
you can press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls and say any of the
following commands to receive directions:
Services
Voice command
Cancel Route
Route Status
Route Summary
Update Route
Help
Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your
vehicle must be equipped with navigation
and your navigation SD card must be in the
SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by Sirius Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius
Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link,
it can help you locate the best gas prices,
find movie listings, get current traffic alerts,
view the current weather map, get
accurate ski conditions and see scores to
current sports games.
457
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
nearby your vehicle’s current location or near any of your
favorite places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five day forecast for the chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted, say
any of the following or a similar
command:
Voice command
Show Traffic
Show Weather
Help
Alerts
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Alerts, then choose from any of
the following services:
Action and DescriptionMessage
The complete messageView
The messageDelete
MessagesDelete All
458
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
This screen displays any system messages
(such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information icon
yellow. After you read or delete the
messages, the icon returns to white.
Calendar
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current
calendar by day, week or month.
911 Assist
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help, which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time, which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or damaged in
a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone,
which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts
where fitted or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more
information about the 911 Assist feature
visit:
Website
visit www.SYNCMyRide.com
www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 40). Important information
regarding airbag deployment is in this
chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 255).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
459
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Setting 911 Assist On
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I (Information)
button to access these features. If your
vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab. Then
select:
Message
Apps
911 Assist
On
You can also access 911 Assist by
pressing:
Message
Settings
Phone
911 Assist
Or you can also select:
Help
911 Assist
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
prior to the incident.
•You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
phone to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the United States,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is
the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (which would
trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to
contact emergency services if 911 Assist
triggers. If a connected phone sustains
damage or loses connection to SYNC,
SYNC searches for, and tries to connect
to, any available previously paired phone
and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(approximately 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. If you fail to cancel the call,
SYNC attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
460
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
911 Assist May Not Work If:
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phones(s) previously paired or
connected to the system are thrown
from the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If
Equipped, US Only)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle’s overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
•Vehicle diagnostic information.
•Scheduled maintenance.
•Open recalls and Field Service Actions.
•Items noted during vehicle inspections
by your authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
461
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Making a Report
If you want to run a report by using the
touchscreen, select:
Message
Apps
Vehicle Health Report
E142599
You can also run a vehicle health
report by voice command.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Vehicle Health Report
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
Where Am I?
For information about your current
location, select:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Message
View your vehicle's
current location, if
your vehicle is
equipped with
navigation. If your
vehicle is not
equipped with
navigation, nothing
displays.
Where Am I?
CLIMATE
Touch the lower right corner on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from this screen.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 416).
462
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E200641
Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the
climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
A
Passenger settings:B
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Touch the heated seat icon to switch the heated seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to switch the climate-controlled seat
off and on (if equipped).
Touch Dual to switch separate passenger side temperature controls off and
on. When you switch off Dual, the passenger side temperature changes to
match the driver side temperature.
Note: The passenger side temperature and the Dual indicator automatically
turn on when the passenger is adjusting their temperature control.
Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated
in your vehicle.
C
Note: When the system is controlling the fan speed automatically, all the fan
speed indicators turn off.
Rear: Touch to access the rear climate control. Rear climate control settings
appear at the bottom of the screen.
D
Touch the power icon to turn the rear climate control functions off and on.
463
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Touch Rear to allow the rear seat passengers to adjust the rear climate settings.
Touch it again to prevent the rear seat passengers from adjusting the settings.
Rear Control automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen to adjust
the rear climate settings.
Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.
To adjust fan speed, touch + or – next to the fan icon.
Touch Rear again to close the rear controls. Closing the rear climate control
functions does not affect their current settings.
Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
E
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning
on) in all airflow modes except Max A/C to reduce risk of fogging. Recirculated
air may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflow
modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
Max A/C: Touch the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
F
A/C: Touch the button to switch air conditioning compressor on or off. Use air
conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
G
Note: In certain conditions (such as when using Max Defrost), the air
conditioning compressor may continue to operate even after you switch off the
air conditioning with the A/C button.
Auto: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature. You
can also use the Auto button to switch off dual zone operation by touching
and holding the button for more than two seconds.
H
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 138).
I
Max Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Outside air flows
through the windshield vents, fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed
and the temperature dial returns to the full heat position. You can use this
setting to defog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated
rear window also automatically turns on when you select Max Defrost.
J
Air distribution control: Touch these buttons to switch airflow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. The system can
distribute air through the following combinations: windshield, windshield/floor,
panel, panel/floor, and floor.
K
464
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when MAX
Defrost is on.
Driver settings:L
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the driver side
of the vehicle.
Touch the heated seat icon to switch the heated seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to switch the climate-controlled seat
off and on (if equipped).
Touch MyTemp to select your preset temperature setpoint. Touch and hold
MyTemp to save a new preset temperature setpoint.
Touch the heated steering wheel icon to switch the heated steering wheel on
and off (if equipped).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
wood-trimmed steering wheel, it does not
heat between the 10 o'clock and 2 o'clock
positions.
Climate Control Voice Commands
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed automatically returns to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust fan speed normally during a voice
session by pressing the fan buttons (or
turning the fan knob) to increase or
decrease the fan speed to the desired
setting.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirc buttons simultaneously, release and
then increase fan speed within 2 seconds.
To re-enable this feature, repeat this
sequence.
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following or a similar command:
Voice commands
Climate On
Climate Off
Adjust the temperature to between 15.0 - 30.0°C or
59 - 86°F.
Set temperature
465
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
NAVIGATION
Note: The navigation SD card must be in
the SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card,
see an authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in
and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
card out to remove it; this could cause
damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press the green
corner of your touchscreen, then press:
Menu Item
Dest.
Choose any of the following:
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Menu Item
Street Address
Intersection
City Center
Map
Edit Route
Cancel Route
To set your destination, enter the
necessary information into the highlighted
text fields (in any order).
For an address destination entry, press:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
Pressing this button
makes the address
location appear on
the map.
Go
To choose a previous destination,
press:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
The last 20 destina-
tions you have
selected appear.
Previous Destina-
tions
466
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Once you have chosen your destination press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
To make this your destination. You can also choose to set this
as a waypoint (have the system route to this point on the way
to your current destination) or save it as a favorite. You can
then choose your route from three different options.
Set as Dest
Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Fastest Route
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest Route
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Eco Route
To begin navigation press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route
for you.
Start Route
During route guidance, you can press the talking bubble icon
that appears in the upper right navigation corner (green bar) if
you want the system to repeat route guidance information.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it
updates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since it
detects when the vehicle is moving.
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road
and you do not press the Start Route
button, the system defaults to the Fastest
Route option and begins guidance.
Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Main Categories
Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Emergency
Community
Health & Medicine
Main Categories
Automotive
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services
467
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the + in
front of the listing.
The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).
cityseekr
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 912
cities (881 in the United States, 20 in
Canada and 11 in Mexico).
E142634
cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address and phone number. If cityseekr
lists the point of interest, more information
is available, such as a brief description,
check-in and checkout times or restaurant
hours.
For a longer review, a list of services
and facilities, the average room, meal
price or the website press:
Menu Item
More Information
This screen displays the point of interest
icon such as:
E143884
Hotel
E142636
Coffeehouse
E142637
Food & Drink
E142638
Nightlife
E142639
Attraction
E142640
This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
468
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
When you are viewing more
information for hotels, cityseekr also
tells you if the hotel has certain
services and facilities using icons, such
as:
•Restaurant
•Business center
•Handicap facilities
•Laundry
•Refrigerator
•24 hour room service
•Fitness center
•Internet access
•Pool
•Wi-FI
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address.
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences
E142607
Select settings for the system to
take into account when planning
your route.
To access the settings options, press
Menu Item
Settings
Navigation
You can then select any of the following
options.
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Display your vehicle’s previously traveled route with white dots.
You can switch this feature:
Breadcrumbs
OffOn
Have the system display your turn listTurn List Format
Bottom to TopTop to Bottom
When parking point of interest notification is on, the icons
display on the map when you get close to your destination.
This may not be very useful in dense areas, and may clutter
the map when other points of interest display. Set the auto-
matic parking point of interest notification. You can switch this
feature:
Parking POI Notification
OffOn
469
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcologicalFastest RouteShortest Route
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on preferred route setting.
Always use
Preferred Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Eco Time
Penalty
When activated, you can to choose to have the system avoid highways,
toll roads, ferries, and car trains when planning your route.
Avoid
Have the system use high-occupancy vehicle lanes, if available, when
planning your route.
Use HOV Lanes
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Navigation Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Select the type of prompts the system uses.Guidance Prompts
Voice and TonesTones Only
Have the system automatically fill in this information based
on what you have already entered into the system. You can
switch this feature:
Auto - Fill State/Province
OffOn
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Traffic Preferences
Then select any of the following:
You can choose how you want the system to handle traffic
problems along your route.
Avoid Traffic Problems
470
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Have the system reroute you to avoid
traffic incidents that develop and
impact the current route. The system
does not provide a traffic alert notific-
ation
Automatic
Have the system always provide a
traffic alert notification for traffic
incidents along the planned route.
You have a choice to accept or ignore
the notification before making the
route deviation.
Manual
Activate traffic alert notifications on or off.Traffic alert notification
These icons will alert you to traffic and driving conditions
including accidents, closures and weather conditions.
You are also able to
switch on and off the 11
traffic map icons.
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Choose areas which you want the system to avoid when
calculating a route for you
Avoid Areas
Then select any of the following:
Once you make a selection, the system tries to avoid the
area(s) if possible for all routes. Select this button to program
an entry, then choose a destination entry method. You can
edit the name or location of a destination or remove it from
your selections.
Add
To remove an area from your selection, choose the listing on
the screen. The screen will change, then press delete and
confirm the deletion.
Delete
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area
of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D
landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land
elements and detailed railway
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe. These maps also contain
features, such as town blocks, building
footprints and railways.
471
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourist value. The 3D
landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.
Coverage varies and improves with
updated map releases.
E174016
Change the appearance of the map display
by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in
the upper left corner of the screen. It
toggles between three different map
modes: Heading up, North up and 3D.
E142642
Heading up (2D map) always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
This view is available for map
scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The
system remembers this setting for larger
map scales, but shows the map in North
up only. If the scale returns below this level,
the system restores Heading up.
E142643
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
E142644
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
This viewing angle can be adjusted
and the map can be rotated 180
degrees by touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
You can also select the following
options:
DescriptionMenu Items
Switches between
full map, street list
and exit view in
route guidance.
View
Displays a pop-up
box that allows
direct access to
navigation settings.
Menu
E174017
Press the speaker button on the
map to mute route guidance.
When the light on the button
illuminates, the feature is on. The speaker
button appears on the map only when
route guidance is active.
E146188
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The
slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther
the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle
is traveling, the farther the map zooms out.
To switch off the feature, just press the +
or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by
swiping your finger across the shaded bar
with the arrows.
472
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
The ETA box under the zoom buttons
appears when a route is active and
displays the distance and time to your
destination. If the button is pressed, a pop
up appears with the destination listed (and
waypoint if applicable) along with mileage
and time to destination. You may also
select to have either the estimated time
to reach your destination or your estimated
arrival time.
Map Icons
E142646
Vehicle mark shows the current
location of your vehicle. It stays
in the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.
E142647
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll
the map; the fixed icon is in the
center of the screen. The map
position closest to the cursor is in
a window on the top center part of the
screen.
E142648
Address book entry default
icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry.
This is the default symbol shown
after the entry has been stored to the
Address Book by any method other than
the map. You can select from any of the
22 icons available. You can use each icon
more than once.
E142649
Home indicates the location on
the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save
one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot
change this icon.
E142650
POI (Point Of Interest) icons
indicate locations of any point of
interest categories you choose to
display on the map. You can
choose to display three point of interest
categories on the map at one time.
E142651
Starting point indicates the
starting point of a planned route.
E142652
Waypoint indicates the location
of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is different
for each waypoint and represents
the position of the waypoint in the route
list.
E142653
Destination symbol indicates the
ending point of a planned route.
E142654
Next maneuver point indicates
the location of the next turn on the
planned route.
E142655
No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map
positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with
poor GPS access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on
the map display to access the following
options:
473
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to select a scrolled location on the map as
your destination. You may scroll the map by pressing your index
finger on the map display. When you reach the desired location,
simply let go and then touch this button.
Set as Dest
Touch this button to set the current location as a waypoint.Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to save the current location to your favorites.Save to Favorites
Touch this button to select icons to display on the map. You
can select up to three icons to display on the map at the same
time. You can switch these features:
POI Icons
OffOn
When on an active route, select any of the following options:View / Edit Route
View Route
Edit Destination/Waypoints
Edit Turn List
Detour
Edit Route Preferences
Edit Traffic Preferences
Cancel Route
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 (in
Mexico, call 01-800-557-5539) or going
to www.navigation.com/sync. You need
to specify the make and model of your
vehicle to determine if there is an update
available.
Navigation Voice Commands
E142599
When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls.
474
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
After the tone, say any of the following
or a similar command:
Voice command
Destination
Zoom Out
Zoom In
Where Am I
Help
The following commands can only be
used when a navigation route is active:
Voice command
Detour
Cancel Route
Show Route
Repeat Instruction
Turn List
One-shot Destination Street Address
To set a destination with voice
commands, you can say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
The system asks
you to say the full
address. The
system displays an
example on-screen.
Find an Address
You can then speak the address naturally,
such as "One two three four Main Street,
Anytown".
MYFORD TOUCH™
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). For more
information visit:
Websites
www.SYNCMyRide.com
www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
475
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC. See
Phone (page 445).
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC. See
Phone (page 445).
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says that the
phonebook has downloaded
but the phonebook in SYNC
is empty or missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
476
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC. Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
You can also preform the
MyFord Touch reset
procedure.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
477
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
The device is not connected.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
You can also preform the
MyFord Touch reset
procedure.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
478
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate your
account on the website.
You may have the wrong
VIN (vehicle identification
number) listed.
I received a text that I did
not activate Vehicle Health
Report.
Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your
account.
When you register your
account, you must choose a
preferred dealer. If it already
lists a dealer, try selecting
another dealer and logging
out. Log back in, change it
back to your preferred
dealer, and retrieve the
report.
The preferred dealer
information did not load
correctly.
I am unable to retrieve the
report on the website, or I
receive a system error.
Update your cellular number
in your account on the
website.
This could be due to your
phone's compatibility.
Bad signal strength.
I am unable to submit a
report.
Make sure you have full
signal strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has
been turned up.
You did not register your
phone correctly on the
website.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is
registered on your
SYNCMyRide account.
Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate this
phone for this service.
Your phone has ID blocker
active.
I heard a commercial when
I tried to use Traffic, Direc-
tions and Information.
Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recog-
nizes you by your phone
number.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is the
same one that is registered
on your SYNCMyRide
account.
479
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until the system
prompts you to begin saying
a command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call. Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
480
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Touchscreen System Reset
The touchscreen system has a system reset feature that can be performed if the function
of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase
any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook,
call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and
hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow a 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC system.
481
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact your authorized
dealer or visit our online store at:
Web Address
www.Accessories.Ford.com
You can also visit:
Web Address
www.Ford.ca
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your
Ford Original Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest
benefit:
•24 months, unlimited mileage.
•The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
•Bumper protector.
•Hood deflectors.
•Side window deflectors.
•Splash guards.
Interior Style
•Ambient lighting.
•Cargo area protector.
•Floor mats.
•Rear console.
Lifestyle
•Ash cup or smoker's package.
•Camping tent*.
•Car covers*.
•Cargo organization and management.
•Rear seat entertainment*.
•Roof crossbars.
•Roof racks and carriers*.
•Trailer hitch balls.
•Trailer hitch drawbars and towing
accessories.
Peace of Mind
•Cargo shade.
•Keyless entry keypad.
•Parking sensors*.
•Remote start.
•Vehicle security systems.
•Wheel locks.
*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
482
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
•When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
•The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
•An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
•If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
483
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have
discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended
service plan backed by Ford Motor
Company, and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and
labor – can easily exceed the price of your
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP
you minimize your risk for unexpected
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.,
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended
service plan authorized and backed by Ford
Motor Company.
That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership
•Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts
•Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
•Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
•Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage
to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle
was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
484
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so
you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
•Windshield wiper blades.
•Spark plugs.
•The clutch disc.
•Brake pads and linings.
•Shock absorbers.
•Struts.
•Engine Belts.
•Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
•Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options
Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an
affordable, no interest, no fee payment
program allowing you all the security and
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying
over time. You are pre-approved with no
credit checks, no hassles! To learn more,
call our Ford ESP specialists at
800-367-3377.
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
•Rental reimbursement.
•Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
•Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
•Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.
485
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 334).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers).
486
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the message
appearing. Make sure you reset the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil
change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset
(page 282).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5000 miles (8000
kilometers) from your last oil change.
Never exceed one year or 10000 miles
(16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
487
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
488
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure**
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
* Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
489
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km) Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display*
Change engine oil and filter.**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints.
490
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display*
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
* Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
** Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 281).
Other maintenance items 1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant. 2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km) Replace accessory drive belt(s). 4
1 Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2 Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4 If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
491
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the
message appearing in your information
display prompting you to change your oil.
•Example 1: The message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers).
Perform the 30000-mile
(48000-kilometer) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
•Example 2: The message has not
come on, but the odometer reads
30000 miles (48000 kilometers) (for
example, the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor was reset at 25000 miles
[40000 kilometers]). Perform the
engine air filter replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.*
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
492
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
* This is an optional feature.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.*
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.**
Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
* This is an optional feature.
**Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 281).
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle maintenance: The Power Transfer
Unit (PTU) in your vehicle does not require
any normal scheduled maintenance. The
system is electronically monitored and
notifies the driver of required service by
displaying a message in the information
display. The PTU lube will be more likely
to require a fluid change if the vehicle has
experienced extended periods of
493
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
extreme/severe duty cycle driving. Do not
check or change the PTU lubricant unless
the unit has been submerged in water,
shows signs of leakage or a message
indicating required service is displayed.
Contact your authorized dealer for service
and to reset the PTU lube life monitor.
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5000 miles (8000
kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine air
filter and cabin air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and
cabin air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
494
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
495
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
496
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
497
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
498
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
499
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
500
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
501
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
502
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
503
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
504
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)
•You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
("MS") . Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of
third party origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
and individually will be referred to as
"SOFTWARE".
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
505
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
•Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process.
•Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble nor permit
others to reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation.
•Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
•Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
•SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
•Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you
fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA.
•Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in
your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included
copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does
not affect unprotected content. When
your DEVICE downloads licenses for
protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list
with the licenses. Content owners may
require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
on your DEVICE to access their content.
If you decline an upgrade, you will not
be able to access content that requires
the upgrade.
506
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
•Consent to Use of Data: You agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may collect and use technical
information gathered in any manner as
part of product support services related
to the SOFTWARE or related services.
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and services suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to
you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
•Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components
that you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
•Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components").
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make
available Supplemental Components, and
no other EULA terms are provided, then
the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of
the SOFTWARE.
507
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
•Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent.
•Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and assumes any risk associated with
the use of the DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content. All rights not
specifically granted under this EULA are
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service providers, their
affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional
information, see:
508
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Website
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
its parent corporation Microsoft
Corporation, or their affiliates or
subsidiaries. For product support, please
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
$250.00).
•THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or
[AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems
Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]
contains [Adobe® Flash® Player]
[Adobe® AIR®] software under license
from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe
Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized
use of the software from this system in
violation of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to legal
action.
Read and follow instructions: Before
using your Windows Automotive- based
system, read and follow all instructions
and safety information provided in this end
user manual ("User's Guide"). Not
following precautions found in this User's
Guide can lead to an accident or other
serious consequences.
509
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
ready reference for you and other users
unfamiliar with the Windows
Automotive-based system. Please make
certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
WARNING
Operating certain parts of this
system while driving can distract
your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or
changing some functions you might be
required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from
the wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions
within the Windows Automotive-based
system may be accomplished using only
voice commands. Using voice commands
while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from
the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a prolonged
view of the screen while you are driving.
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the
system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may
be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently
a statistical process which is subject to
errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
any speech recognition functions included
in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
distract your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious consequences.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Any such
feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by
this system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
510
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate because
of changes in roads, traffic controls or
driving conditions. Always use good
judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to
be contained in the map database for such
navigation features.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (“Agreement”) between you
and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect
to the Telenav Software (including
upgrades, modifications, or additions
thereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”).
All references herein to “you” and “your”
means you, your employees, agents, and
contractors, and any other entity on whose
behalf you accept these terms and
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
account information, as well as other
payment and personal information
provided by you to Telenav (directly or
through the use of the Telenav Software,
is subject to Telenav’s privacy policy
located at http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the Telenav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the Telenav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the Telenav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
511
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform Telenav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants
to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the Telenav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the Telenav
Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use the
Telenav Software only for your personal
business or leisure purposes, and not to
provide commercial navigation services to
other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following:
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the Telenav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or structure
of the Telenav Software without the prior
express written consent of Telenav; (c)
remove from the Telenav Software, or
alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software
to others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e)
use the Telenav Software in any manner
that (i) infringes the intellectual property
or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,
defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent
out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the Telenav
Software without advanced written
permission of Telenav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will Telenav,
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be
liable for any decision made or action
taken by you or anyone else in reliance on
the information provided by the Telenav
Software. Telenav also does not warrant
the accuracy of the map or other data used
for the Telenav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
Telenav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely on
the Telenav Software for critical navigation
in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the
accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
functionality of the Telenav Software are
not intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
512
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
involving a neutral arbitrator and
administered by the American Arbitration
Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and the
judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court
having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
binding upon both parties. You expressly
agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance
hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of
the State of California, without giving
effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To
the extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both Telenav and you agree to submit to
the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the County of Santa Clara, California. The
United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods shall
not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
513
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by
the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav
may assign this Agreement to any other
party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this
Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
Telenav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the Telenav Software, you
consent to receive from Telenav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
Telenav Software (collectively, “Notices”)
electronically. Telenav may provide such
Notices by posting them on Telenav’s
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the Telenav Software.
8.4
Telenav’s or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party’s right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words “include” and “including,” and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
“without limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
514
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors:
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand.
© 20xx. All rights reserved.
Permitted Use.
You agree to use this Data together with
the Telenav Software solely for the internal
business and personal purposes for which
you were licensed, and not for service
bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works
of, or reverse engineer any portion of this
Data, and may not transfer or distribute it
in any form, for any purpose, except to the
extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions.
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by Telenav, and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not use this Data (a) with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
515
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning.
The Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the passage
of time, changing circumstances, sources
used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty.
This Data is provided to you “as is,” and
you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav
and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or
results to be obtained from this Data, or
that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING
ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT
OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM
THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT
OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,
EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control.
You shall not export from anywhere any
part of the Data or any direct product
thereof except in compliance with, and
with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered
by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of
the U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent
516
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
that any such export laws, rules or
regulations prohibit HERE from complying
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement.
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between Telenav (and
its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
[insert “Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used], without giving effect
to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)
the United Nations Convention for
Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You
agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for
any and all disputes, claims and actions
arising from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users.
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
517
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
518
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
519
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice require-
ment for Jordan Data is a
material term of the Agree-
ment. If Client or any of its
Jordan
permitted sublicensees (if
any) fail to meet such
requirement, HERE shall
have the right to terminate
Client’s license with respect
to the Jordan Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
520
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all
copies of the Data and/or packaging
relating thereto shall include the
respective Third Party Notices set forth
below and used as described below
corresponding to the Territory (or
portion thereof) included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great
Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed al
tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
521
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
522
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
523
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
#6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
524
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
You agree that you will use the content
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own
personal, non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data (except in a Tag associated with a
music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,
including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for
any information that you provide, including
any copyrighted material or music file
information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
525
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Vehicle with SYNC only
United States and Mexico
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1
IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Mexico
Model: KMHSG1P1
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
The operation of this equipment is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
equipment or device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this
equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Vehicle with SYNC with
Touchscreen/My Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
526
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
1
180 Degree Parking Aid Camera..............211
Camera Views......................................................212
Using the 180 degree camera system..........211
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive.....................................184
A
A/C
See: Climate Control.........................................129
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................189
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................189
Accessories....................................................482
Exterior Style.......................................................482
Interior Style........................................................482
Lifestyle.................................................................482
Peace of Mind.....................................................482
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation.............................................11
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............214
Active Park Assist........................................202
Deactivating the Active Park Assist
Feature.............................................................206
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular Parking,
Park Out Assist..............................................202
Troubleshooting the System........................206
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................291
Vertical Aim Adjustment..................................291
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................76
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................72
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................72
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................73
End of Travel Position.........................................73
Memory Feature....................................................73
Airbag Disposal...............................................47
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control.........................................129
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm..........................................71
Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................71
Arming the Alarm..................................................71
Disarming the Alarm............................................71
Appendices....................................................505
Audible Warnings and Indicators...........100
Automatic Transmission Warning
Chime................................................................100
Engine On Warning Chime.............................100
Headlamps On Warning Chime...................100
Key in Ignition Warning Chime......................100
Keyless Warning Alert .....................................100
Parking Brake On Warning Chime...............100
Audio Control...................................................73
Seek and Media.....................................................74
Type 1.........................................................................73
Type 2........................................................................73
Audio System................................................353
General Information.........................................353
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC.............................................................354
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD..................................................357
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
FM/CD..........................................................358
Menu Structure..................................................360
Autolamps.........................................................81
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps.........................................................81
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Premium AM/FM/CD.....................131
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System.......................132
Automatic High Beam Control.................83
Activating the System........................................84
Manually Overriding the System....................84
527
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Automatic Transmission...........................180
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................182
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................183
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission....................................................181
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission............................180
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
2.3L EcoBoost™.......................................286
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check -
3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™...........286
Adding Transmission Fluid.............................287
Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level..................................................................286
Autowipers........................................................77
Auxiliary Power Points................................162
110 Volt AC Power Point...................................162
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................162
Locations...............................................................162
B
Blind Spot Information System..............224
Using the System...............................................225
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........276
Booster Seats..................................................26
Types of Booster Seats.......................................27
Brake Fluid Check........................................288
Brakes...............................................................189
General Information..........................................189
Breaking-In.....................................................252
Bulb Specification Chart...........................297
C
Cabin Air Filter...............................................138
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™..................................................341
Specifications......................................................341
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................344
Specifications.....................................................345
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................348
Specifications.....................................................349
Capacities and Specifications................334
Cargo Nets......................................................233
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior.............................300
Center Console..............................................164
Rear Seat Armrest..............................................164
Changing a Bulb...........................................293
Front Direction Indicator.................................294
Front Fog Lamp..................................................295
Headlamp............................................................294
Headlamp High Beam.....................................294
LED Lamps...........................................................296
License Plate Lamp..........................................296
Rear Direction Indicator and Reversing
Lamp.................................................................295
Changing a Fuse...........................................274
Fuses.......................................................................274
Changing a Road Wheel...........................328
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.....................................................328
Tire Change Procedure....................................329
Changing the 12V Battery.........................289
Changing the Engine Air Filter................299
Changing the Wiper Blades......................291
Front Wiper Blades............................................291
Rear Wiper Blade................................................291
Checking MyKey System Status...............57
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................290
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance.................................................38
Child Safety.......................................................15
General Information.............................................15
Child Safety Locks.........................................29
Left-Hand Side.....................................................30
Right-Hand Side...................................................30
Child Seat Positioning..................................28
Child Seats.........................................................16
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................303
Cleaning Products......................................300
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................304
Cleaning the Engine....................................301
Cleaning the Exterior.................................300
Exterior Chrome Parts.....................................300
Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................301
Stripes or Graphics............................................301
Underbody............................................................301
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................303
528
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Cleaning the Interior...................................302
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................302
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56
Climate............................................................462
Climate Control Voice Commands.............465
Climate Control.............................................129
Climate Controlled Seats..........................155
Cooled Seats........................................................156
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................282
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......46
Creating a MyKey............................................55
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................55
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................227
False Alerts...........................................................229
Switching the System Off and On..............229
System Errors......................................................229
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................228
System Limitations...........................................228
System Sensors..................................................228
Using the System...............................................227
Cruise Control..................................................74
Principle of Operation.......................................213
Type 1.........................................................................74
Type 2........................................................................74
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................213
Customer Assistance................................260
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................9
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps.............................82
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable).......................................83
Type 2 - Configurable.........................................83
Digital Radio..................................................362
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................363
Direction Indicators.......................................85
Driver Alert.....................................................220
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION..........................220
USING DRIVER ALERT....................................220
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................41
Children and Airbags............................................41
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.........................................................41
Driving Aids....................................................220
Driving Hints...................................................252
Driving Through Water...............................253
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................82
E
Economical Driving.....................................252
Emission Control System...........................177
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................178
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................178
End User License Agreement.................505
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA).............................................................505
Engine Block Heater....................................169
Using the Engine Block Heater......................170
Engine Coolant Check...............................282
Adding Engine Coolant....................................283
Checking the Engine Coolant........................282
Recycled Engine Coolant................................284
Severe Climates.................................................284
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling.............................................................284
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................70
Engine Oil Check...........................................281
Adding Engine Oil...............................................281
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.3L
EcoBoost™..................................................281
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Duratec/3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................281
Engine Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................334
Drivebelt Routing...............................................334
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................335
Drivebelt Routing...............................................335
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................335
Drivebelt Routing...............................................336
529
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Entertainment..............................................429
AM/FM Radio......................................................430
Bluetooth Audio.................................................445
CD...........................................................................440
SD Card Slot and USB Port............................441
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)........................................................435
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................445
Environment......................................................14
Essential Towing Checks..........................246
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................247
Hitches...................................................................246
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)........................................248
Safety Chains.......................................................247
Trailer Brakes........................................................247
Trailer Lamps.......................................................247
When Towing a Trailer......................................247
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options..................................13
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................484
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)............485
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)........................484
Exterior Mirrors................................................88
Auto-dimming Feature......................................89
Auto-Folding Mirrors...........................................88
Blind Spot Information System......................90
Direction Indicator Mirrors ...............................89
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................88
Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................89
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................89
Memory Mirrors ....................................................89
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................88
F
Fastening the Safety Belts..........................32
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt................................34
Safety Belt Extension Assembly.....................35
Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................33
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........32
Floor Mats.......................................................253
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................84
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................76
Ford Credit..........................................................11
(U.S. Only).................................................................11
Four-Wheel Drive.........................................184
Principle of Operation.......................................184
Front Fog Lamps............................................84
Front Parking Aid..........................................199
Obstacle Distance Indicator.........................200
Front Passenger Sensing System............42
Fuel and Refueling.........................................171
Fuel Consumption........................................176
Calculating Fuel Economy...............................176
Filling the Tank.....................................................176
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................173
Fuel Filter........................................................289
Fuel Quality - E85.........................................172
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................172
Fuel Quality.....................................................172
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................172
Fuel Shutoff...................................................256
Fuses................................................................266
Fuse Specification Chart..........................266
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.........271
Power Distribution Box....................................266
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener............157
Gauges...............................................................93
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............96
Fuel Gauge.............................................................96
Information Display.............................................95
Type 1........................................................................93
Type 2.......................................................................94
Type 3.......................................................................95
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................48
Intelligent Access.................................................48
General Maintenance Information.......486
Multi-Point Inspection....................................488
Owner Checks and Services..........................487
Protecting Your Investment..........................486
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................486
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?....................................................486
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................263
530
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Getting the Services You Need..............260
Away From Home.............................................260
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake.............................................190
Hazard Warning Flashers.........................256
HDC
See: Using Hill Descent Control....................196
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................82
Head Restraints............................................140
Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................141
Tilting Head Restraints ....................................142
Heated Seats.................................................154
Front Seats............................................................154
Rear Seats.............................................................155
Heated Steering Wheel................................75
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................138
Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................138
Heated Rear Window........................................138
Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................129
Hill Start Assist.............................................190
Switching the System On and Off................191
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................190
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................134
Cooling the Interior Quickly............................136
General Hints.......................................................134
Heating the Interior Quickly............................135
Recommended Settings for Cooling ..........136
Recommended Settings for Heating..........136
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................137
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................189
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........276
I
Ignition Switch...............................................165
In California (U.S. Only).............................261
Information Display Control.......................75
Information Display Control Features...........75
Information Displays....................................101
General Information...........................................101
Information....................................................453
911 Assist...............................................................459
Alerts......................................................................458
Calendar...............................................................459
Sirius Travel Link.................................................457
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States
Only)..................................................................453
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, US
Only)...................................................................461
Information Messages.................................115
4WD..........................................................................115
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................116
AdvanceTrac™.....................................................116
Alarm........................................................................116
Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................117
Automatic High Beam Control........................117
Battery and Charging System.........................118
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System.....................................................118
Brake System........................................................119
Collision Warning System................................119
Doors and Locks..................................................119
Driver Alert............................................................120
Electronic Stability Control.............................120
Engine.....................................................................120
Fuel............................................................................121
Hill Descent Control............................................121
Hill Start Assist.....................................................121
Keys and Intelligent Access.............................122
Lane Keeping System........................................123
Maintenance.........................................................123
MyKey......................................................................124
Park Aid..................................................................124
Park Brake..............................................................124
Power Steering....................................................125
Pre-Collision Warning System.......................125
Remote Start........................................................125
Seats........................................................................126
Starting System..................................................126
Terrain Management System.........................127
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................126
Traction Control...................................................127
Trailer.......................................................................127
Transmission........................................................128
531
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Installing Child Seats......................................17
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................17
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................22
Using Tether Straps.............................................24
Instrument Cluster.........................................93
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................82
Interior Lamps.................................................85
Battery Saver.........................................................86
Dome Lamp...........................................................85
Front Row Map Lamps......................................85
Second Row Dome and Courtesy
Lamps.................................................................86
Second Row Dome and Map Lamps...........86
Third Row Cargo Lamp......................................86
Interior Mirror...................................................90
Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................90
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................257
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................257
Jump Starting......................................................258
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................257
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................258
K
Keyless Entry....................................................67
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad.................................................................67
Keyless Starting............................................165
Ignition Modes.....................................................166
Keys and Remote Controls........................48
Principle of Operation........................................48
L
Lane Keeping System................................220
Switching the System On and Off................221
Lighting Control..............................................80
Headlamp Flasher................................................81
High Beams............................................................80
Lighting..............................................................80
General Information...........................................80
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............234
Load Carrying................................................233
Load Limit.......................................................235
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles.............................................................242
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................235
Locking and Unlocking................................60
Activating Intelligent Access.............................61
Autolock...................................................................62
Autounlock ............................................................62
Battery Saver.........................................................63
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock........................................................62
Illuminated Entry..................................................63
Illuminated Exit.....................................................63
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade...........................................................60
Opening a Rear Door from Inside..................60
Power Door Locks................................................60
Remote Control....................................................60
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter.........................................................61
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys.......................................................................61
Locks..................................................................60
Luggage Covers............................................234
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................328
M
Maintenance..................................................275
General Information..........................................275
Manual Climate Control.............................129
Manual Liftgate...............................................63
Closing the Liftgate.............................................64
Opening the Liftgate...........................................64
Manual Seats.................................................143
Lumbar Adjustment..........................................144
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................143
Recline Adjustment...........................................143
Media Hub......................................................367
532
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Memory Function.........................................146
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................147
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key
Fob.......................................................................147
Saving a PreSet Position.................................146
Message Center
See: Information Displays................................101
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors..............138
See: Windows and Mirrors................................87
Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof............................................................91
Bounce-Back.........................................................92
Opening and Closing the Moonroof...............91
Opening and Closing the Sunscreen.............91
Venting the Moonroof........................................92
Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................336
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec..............337
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................338
MyFord Touch™..........................................406
General Information........................................406
MyFord Touch™ Troubleshooting.........475
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................58
MyKey™.............................................................54
Principle of Operation........................................54
N
Navigation......................................................466
cityseekr...............................................................468
Destination Mode.............................................466
Map Mode..............................................................471
Navigation Map Updates................................474
Navigation Voice Commands........................474
Point of Interest (POI) Categories...............467
Quick-touch Buttons........................................473
Setting Your Navigation Preferences.........469
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........489
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................489
Normal Maintenance Intervals....................490
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................282
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................281
Opening and Closing the Hood..............276
Closing the Hood................................................277
Opening the Hood.............................................276
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................264
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........264
Overhead Console.......................................164
P
Parking Aids....................................................198
Principle of Operation......................................198
Parking Brake.................................................190
Passenger Knee Airbag................................45
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................70
SecuriLock®...........................................................70
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................70
Pedals.................................................................76
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................39
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................39
Phone...............................................................445
Making Calls........................................................448
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................447
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................446
Phone Menu Options.......................................448
Phone Settings....................................................451
Phone Voice Commands................................452
Receiving Calls...................................................448
Text Messaging..................................................449
Post-Crash Alert System..........................259
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking............................60
Power Liftgate.................................................64
Hands-Free Feature............................................67
Obstacle Detection.............................................66
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................65
Setting the Liftgate Open Height..................66
Stopping the Liftgate Movement..................66
Power Seats...................................................144
Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active
Motion ...............................................................145
Power Lumbar.....................................................145
533
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Power Steering Fluid Check....................288
Power Windows..............................................87
Accessory Delay....................................................87
Bounce-Back.........................................................87
One-Touch Down.................................................87
One-Touch Up.......................................................87
Window Lock.........................................................87
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................230
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System...............................................................231
Protecting the Environment........................14
R
Rear Parking Aid...........................................198
Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................199
Rear Passenger Climate Controls...........137
Rear Seats........................................................147
Adjusting the Rear Seats..................................147
Rear Under Floor Storage.........................233
Adjustable Load Floor......................................233
Cargo Management System..........................233
Rear View Camera......................................208
Using the Rear View Camera
System.............................................................208
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera..................................208
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........78
Rear Camera Washer..........................................79
Rear Window Washer.........................................79
Rear Window Wiper.............................................78
Recommended Towing Weights...........244
Refueling..........................................................174
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System.................175
Remote Control..............................................49
Car Finder................................................................52
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters .................49
Intelligent Access Key........................................49
Memory Feature....................................................51
Remote Start ........................................................52
Replacing the Battery.........................................50
Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................52
Remote Start..................................................139
Automatic Settings............................................139
Removing a Headlamp..............................293
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............304
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.........................................11
Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs...................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................53
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................265
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................264
Roadside Assistance..................................255
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................255
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................255
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................255
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................255
Roadside Emergencies..............................255
Roof Racks and Load Carriers................234
Adjusting the Crossbar....................................235
Thumbwheel Kit.................................................234
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................252
Running Out of Fuel.....................................173
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................173
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................173
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................36
Safety Belt Minder..........................................37
Belt-Minder™.........................................................37
Safety Belts.......................................................31
Principle of Operation..........................................31
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................36
Conditions of operation.....................................36
Safety Canopy™............................................45
Safety Precautions........................................171
534
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Satellite Radio..............................................364
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)................................................................365
Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............365
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service..................365
Troubleshooting.................................................366
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........494
Scheduled Maintenance..........................486
Seats.................................................................140
Security..............................................................70
Settings............................................................416
Clock........................................................................417
Display.....................................................................417
Settings..................................................................421
Sound.....................................................................419
Vehicle....................................................................419
Side Airbags.....................................................44
Side Sensing System.................................200
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................201
Sitting in the Correct Position.................140
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................324
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Utility Type Vehicles........................................12
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II).......................12
Special Instructions..............................................12
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance............12
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow............12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................492
Exceptions............................................................493
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.............................................213
Stability Control............................................193
Principle of Operation.......................................193
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................165
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................166
Automatic Engine Shutdown........................168
Failure to Start.....................................................167
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes...............169
Important Ventilating Information..............169
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................168
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................168
Vehicles with an Ignition Key.........................166
Vehicles with Keyless Start............................166
Starting and Stopping the Engine..........165
General Information..........................................165
Steering...........................................................229
Electric Power Steering...................................229
Steering Wheel................................................72
Storage Compartments.............................164
Sunroof
See: Moonroof........................................................91
Sun Visors..........................................................91
Illuminated Vanity Mirror....................................91
Supplementary Restraints System.........40
Principle of Operation........................................40
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................384
911 Assist...............................................................384
SYNC Mobile Apps...........................................386
SYNC™...........................................................368
General Information.........................................368
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................398
T
Tailgate
See: Manual Liftgate...........................................63
See: Power Liftgate.............................................64
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............334
Terrain Response..........................................195
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................262
535
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Tire Care...........................................................310
Glossary of Tire Terminology...........................311
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................310
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall.............................................................312
Temperature A B C..............................................311
Traction AA A B C...............................................310
Treadwear.............................................................310
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........325
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................326
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................326
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................307
Towing a Trailer.............................................243
Load Placement.................................................243
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
2.3L EcoBoost™.......................................249
Emergency Towing............................................249
Recreational Towing.........................................249
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™...........250
Emergency Towing............................................250
Recreational Towing.........................................250
Towing..............................................................243
Traction Control............................................192
Principle of Operation.......................................192
Trailer Sway Control...................................244
Transmission Code Designation............340
Transmission.................................................180
Transmission
See: Transmission..............................................180
Transporting the Vehicle...........................248
U
Under Hood Overview - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................278
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................279
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................280
Universal Garage Door Opener................157
HomeLink Wireless Control System............157
USB Port..........................................................367
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................214
Automatic Cancellation....................................217
Blocked Sensor....................................................218
Canceling the Set Speed.................................216
Changing the Set Speed...................................217
Detection Issues..................................................217
Following a Vehicle............................................215
Hilly Condition Usage.........................................217
Overriding the System......................................216
Resuming the Set Speed..................................217
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed..............215
Setting the Gap Distance................................215
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off........................................................................217
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................214
Switching to Normal Cruise Control............219
System Not Available........................................218
Using Cruise Control....................................213
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................214
Switching Cruise Control On...........................213
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................184
Driving In Special Conditions With
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)...........................185
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles.............................................................185
Using Hill Descent Control........................196
Principle of operation.......................................196
Using hill descent control...............................196
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................58
Using Snow Chains.....................................324
Using Stability Control...............................194
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
(RSC®)..............................................................194
Using Summer Tires...................................323
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................389
Accessing Your USB Song Library...............393
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings............................................................395
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port..........................................................389
Media Menu Features......................................393
Media Voice Commands................................390
USB 2.....................................................................395
Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........395
536
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone.............372
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu...................................................................377
Accessing Your Phone Settings...................380
Bluetooth Devices..............................................381
Making Calls.........................................................375
Pairing a Phone for the First Time...............372
Pairing Subsequent Phones...........................373
Phone Options during an Active Call.........376
Phone Voice Commands................................374
Receiving Calls....................................................375
System Settings.................................................382
Text Messaging...................................................378
Using Terrain Response.............................195
Using Traction Control................................192
Switching the System Off...............................192
System Indicator Lights and
Messages..........................................................192
Using a Switch.....................................................192
Using the Information Display
Controls.............................................................192
Using Voice Recognition...........................370
Initiating a Voice Session................................370
System Interaction and Feedback................371
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................262
V
Vehicle Care..................................................300
General Information........................................300
Vehicle Certification Label.......................340
Vehicle Identification Number................339
Vehicle Storage............................................304
Battery...................................................................305
Body.......................................................................305
Brakes....................................................................305
Cooling system...................................................305
Engine....................................................................305
Fuel system.........................................................305
General..................................................................305
Miscellaneous....................................................306
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................306
Tires........................................................................305
Ventilation
See: Climate Control.........................................129
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............339
Voice Control....................................................74
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators................96
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................96
Anti-Lock Braking System.................................97
Automatic High Beam Control........................97
Battery......................................................................97
Blind Spot Monitor...............................................97
Brake System.........................................................97
Cruise Control........................................................97
Direction Indicator................................................97
Door Ajar..................................................................97
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................97
Engine Oil................................................................98
Fasten Safety Belt...............................................98
Front Airbag...........................................................98
Front Fog Lamps..................................................98
Heads Up Display................................................98
High Beam..............................................................98
Hood Ajar................................................................98
Lane Keeping Aid.................................................98
Liftgate Ajar............................................................98
Low Fuel Level......................................................98
Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................98
Low Washer Fluid................................................99
Parking Lamps......................................................99
Powertrain Fault...................................................99
Service Engine Soon...........................................99
Stability Control...................................................99
Stability Control Off............................................99
Transmission Tow/Haul....................................99
Washer Fluid Check....................................288
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior.............................300
See: Wipers and Washers..................................77
Waxing..............................................................301
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................328
Wheels and Tires.........................................307
General Information.........................................307
Technical Specifications.................................332
Windows and Mirrors....................................87
Windshield Washers.....................................78
Front Camera Washer........................................78
Windshield Wipers.........................................77
Speed Dependent Wipers.................................77
537
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Wipers and Washers......................................77
Wrecker Towing
See: Transporting the Vehicle.......................248
538
Explorer (TUB), enUSA, First Printing
Index

Navigation menu